Manual

Terminal
3035

www.soehnle-professional.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

1. GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................................................................... 7

1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Intended use ........................................................................................................................................ 7
1.3 Safety instructions............................................................................................................................... 8
1.4 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Maintenance and service .................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Product Warranty/liability ................................................................................................................... 9
1.7 Setup instructions ............................................................................................................................... 9
2. DEVICE DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Connection and device description .................................................................................................. 10
2.2 Technical data ................................................................................................................................... 10
2.3 Symbols on the display ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.4 Calibration instructions ..................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.1 Name plate................................................................................................................................. 12
2.4.2 Calibration counter .................................................................................................................... 12
2.5 Switching on / off .............................................................................................................................. 13
3. OPERATING CONCEPT ............................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Setting mode...................................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Program mode ................................................................................................................................... 15
3.3 Function keys ..................................................................................................................................... 15
4. SETTING MODE......................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Starting the setting mode ................................................................................................................. 18
4.2 Program settings ............................................................................................................................... 19
4.3 Setting mode Terminal settings ....................................................................................................... 20
4.4 Setting mode Scale settings ............................................................................................................. 26
4.5 Setting Mode Communication Settings ........................................................................................... 29
4.6 Setting mode Settings Service .......................................................................................................... 40
4.7 Reset Terminal ................................................................................................................................... 40
5. BASIC FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................... 41
5.1 Switching on ...................................................................................................................................... 41
5.2 Switching off ...................................................................................................................................... 41
5.3 Program selection ............................................................................................................................. 41
5.4 Zeroing ............................................................................................................................................... 41
5.5 Tare function...................................................................................................................................... 42
5.6 Gross display ..................................................................................................................................... 42
5.7 Scale switching .................................................................................................................................. 42
5.8 Tenfold display x10 ........................................................................................................................... 43
5.9 Hold function ..................................................................................................................................... 44
5.10 Secondary display ........................................................................................................................... 45
5.10.1 Second unit .............................................................................................................................. 47
5.11 Organizational data (identifier) ....................................................................................................... 49
5.12 Alphanumeric input ......................................................................................................................... 52
5.13 Key lock ............................................................................................................................................ 53
5.14 User Password ................................................................................................................................ 54
5.15 Login function / process start function ......................................................................................... 54
5.16 SD card data backup ....................................................................................................................... 59
5.17 Volume measurement ..................................................................................................................... 60
5.18 Dynamic function keys .................................................................................................................... 62
5.18.1 Configuration commands ............................................................................................................ 62

2
 5.18.2 Defining a dynamic function key ................................................................................................. 62
5.18.3 Switching dynamic function keys on/off .................................................................................... 64
5.18.4 Defining the level of the dynamic function keys......................................................................... 65
5.18.5 Saving the settings of the dynamic function keys ..................................................................... 65
5.18.6 Loading the settings of the dynamic function keys ................................................................... 65
5.18.7 Printing conditions ....................................................................................................................... 66
6 APPLICATION PROGRAMS ....................................................................................................... 67
6.1 Selection of the application programs ............................................................................................. 67
6.2 Function keys ..................................................................................................................................... 67
6.3 Navigation in the application programs ........................................................................................... 68
6.4 Custom programs.............................................................................................................................. 68
6.5 Weighing and taring........................................................................................................................... 69
6.5.1 Function keys ............................................................................................................................. 69
6.5.2 Display view ............................................................................................................................... 69
6.5.3 Display information field ........................................................................................................... 70
6.5.4 Weighing without taring ............................................................................................................ 71
6.5.5 Manual taring ............................................................................................................................. 71
6.5.6 Taring with manual tare ............................................................................................................ 71
6.5.7 Multiplicative tare ...................................................................................................................... 72
6.5.8 Additive tare ............................................................................................................................... 72
6.5.9 Intermediate tare ....................................................................................................................... 73
6.5.10 Automatic tare ......................................................................................................................... 73
6.5.11 Fixed tare value memory ......................................................................................................... 74
6.5.12 Error messages when taring ................................................................................................... 75
6.5.13 Display options with the Info key............................................................................................ 75
6.5.14 Accepting current values into the fixed memory................................................................... 76
6.5.15 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................... 76
6.5.16 Settings in Setting Mode ......................................................................................................... 77
6.6 Totalizing and picking ....................................................................................................................... 78
6.6.1 Function keys ............................................................................................................................. 78
6.6.2 Display view ............................................................................................................................... 79
6.6.3 Display information field ........................................................................................................... 80
6.6.4 Tare function.............................................................................................................................. 81
6.6.5 Operating the totalizing function .............................................................................................. 81
6.6.6 Options for displaying totals ..................................................................................................... 82
6.6.7 Relief factor for summation ...................................................................................................... 82
6.6.8 Auto-summing / -picking........................................................................................................... 82
6.6.9 Preferred totalizing scale .......................................................................................................... 82
6.6.10 Assigning and deleting the sequence number ...................................................................... 83
6.6.11 Item counter ............................................................................................................................ 83
6.6.12 Keys that trigger printing......................................................................................................... 83
6.6.13 Display of current totals .......................................................................................................... 83
6.6.14 Displaying individual items ..................................................................................................... 84
6.6.15 Display options with the Info key............................................................................................ 85
6.6.16 Accepting current values into the fixed memory................................................................... 85
6.6.17 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................... 86
6.6.18 Settings in setting mode ......................................................................................................... 86
6.7 Counting ............................................................................................................................................. 88
6.7.1 Function keys ............................................................................................................................. 88
6.7.2 Display view Counting ............................................................................................................... 89
6.7.3 Display information field ........................................................................................................... 90
6.7.4 Tare function.............................................................................................................................. 90
6.7.5 Counting function ...................................................................................................................... 91
6.7.6 Totalizing and picking ............................................................................................................... 93
6.7.7 Reference Statistics .................................................................................................................. 97
6.7.8 Piece control .............................................................................................................................. 98
6.7.9 Counting with several weighbridges ........................................................................................ 99

3
 6.7.10 Counting accuracy................................................................................................................. 100
6.7.11 Display options with the Info key.......................................................................................... 102
6.7.12 Accepting current values into the fixed memory................................................................. 102
6.7.13 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................. 103
6.7.14 Settings in Setting Mode ....................................................................................................... 103
6.8 Checking .......................................................................................................................................... 107
6.8.1 Function keys ........................................................................................................................... 107
6.8.2 Display view ............................................................................................................................. 108
6.8.3 Display information field ......................................................................................................... 109
6.8.4 Tare function............................................................................................................................ 109
6.8.5 Control functions ..................................................................................................................... 109
6.8.6 Totalizing and picking ............................................................................................................. 112
6.8.7 Display options with the Info key ............................................................................................ 116
6.8.8 Saving current values to the fixed memory ........................................................................... 116
6.8.9 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................... 117
6.8.10 Settings in Setting Mode ....................................................................................................... 117
6.9 Classification ................................................................................................................................... 120
6.9.1 Function keys ........................................................................................................................... 120
6.9.2 Display view ............................................................................................................................. 121
6.9.3 Display information field ......................................................................................................... 122
6.9.4 Tare function............................................................................................................................ 122
6.9.5 Classification functions .......................................................................................................... 122
6.9.6 Totalizing and picking ............................................................................................................. 125
6.9.7 Display options with the Info key ............................................................................................ 129
6.9.8 Accepting current values into the fixed memory ................................................................... 129
6.9.9 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................... 130
6.9.10 Settings in Setting Mode ....................................................................................................... 130
6.10 Recipe............................................................................................................................................. 133
6.10.1 Function keys......................................................................................................................... 133
6.10.2 Display view ........................................................................................................................... 134
6.10.3 Display information field ....................................................................................................... 135
6.10.4 Tare function ......................................................................................................................... 135
6.10.5 Recipe functions .................................................................................................................... 135
6.10.6 Component check ................................................................................................................. 138
6.10.7 Display options with the Info key.......................................................................................... 140
6.10.8 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................. 140
6.10.9 Settings in Setting Mode ....................................................................................................... 140
6.11 Neutral measurement ................................................................................................................... 142
6.11.1 Function keys......................................................................................................................... 142
6.11.2 Display view ........................................................................................................................... 143
6.11.3 Display information field ....................................................................................................... 144
6.11.4 Tare function ......................................................................................................................... 145
6.11.5 Neutral measurement functions .......................................................................................... 145
6.11.6 Totalizing and picking ........................................................................................................... 147
6.11.7 Quantity control ..................................................................................................................... 151
6.11.8 Neutral measurement with several weighing bridges ......................................................... 152
6.11.9 Display options with the Info key.......................................................................................... 153
6.11.10 Accepting current values into the fixed memory .............................................................. 153
6.11.11 Organization data (identifier) ............................................................................................. 154
6.11.12 Settings in Setting Mode ..................................................................................................... 154
6.12 Vehicle scale .................................................................................................................................. 157
6.12.1 Function keys......................................................................................................................... 157
6.12.2 Display view ........................................................................................................................... 158
6.12.3 Display information field ....................................................................................................... 159
6.12.2 Tare function ......................................................................................................................... 159
6.12.3 Truck scale functions ............................................................................................................ 160
6.12.4 Totalizing ............................................................................................................................... 165
6.12.5 Traffic light control ................................................................................................................ 168

4
 6.12.6 Vehicle inspection ................................................................................................................. 169
6.12.7 Display options with the Info key.......................................................................................... 170
6.12.8 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................. 170
6.12.9 Settings in Setting Mode ....................................................................................................... 170
6.13 Dynamic switching ........................................................................................................................ 172
6.13.1 Function keys......................................................................................................................... 172
6.13.2 Display view ........................................................................................................................... 173
6.13.3 Display of information field .................................................................................................. 174
6.13.4 Tare function ......................................................................................................................... 175
6.13.5 Activating IO control .............................................................................................................. 175
6.13.6 Dynamic switching functions ............................................................................................... 175
6.13.7 Totalizing and picking ........................................................................................................... 180
6.13.9 Transferring current values into the fixed memory ............................................................. 184
6.13.10 Organizational data (identifier)........................................................................................... 185
6.13.11 Settings in the setting mode............................................................................................... 185
6.14 Weighing in percent ....................................................................................................................... 187
6.14.1 Function keys......................................................................................................................... 187
6.14.2 Display view ........................................................................................................................... 188
6.14.3 Display information field ....................................................................................................... 189
6.14.3 Tare function ......................................................................................................................... 189
6.14.4 Functions Weighing in Percent ............................................................................................. 190
6.14.5 Totalizing and picking ........................................................................................................... 191
6.14.6 Percentage control ................................................................................................................ 194
6.14.7 Display options with the Info key.......................................................................................... 196
6.14.8 Organizational data (identifier) ............................................................................................. 196
6.14.9 Settings in Setting Mode ....................................................................................................... 196
7. Communication....................................................................................................................... 199
7.1 Alibi memory .................................................................................................................................... 199
7.1.1 Activating the alibi memory .................................................................................................... 199
7.1.2 Read alibi memory ................................................................................................................... 200
7.1.3 Search for additional field in alibi memory ............................................................................ 201
7.1.4 Extended additional field in the alibi memory........................................................................ 201
7.1.5 Delete, disable or replace the alibi memory ........................................................................... 202
7.2 Interface 1 RS 232 (internal) ........................................................................................................... 203
7.3 Interface Port 2 ................................................................................................................................ 204
7.4 Interface Port 3 ................................................................................................................................ 205
7.5 USB ................................................................................................................................................... 206
7.5.1 Data logger............................................................................................................................... 207
7.6 Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................ 208
7.7 Print image ....................................................................................................................................... 209
7.8 EDP settings..................................................................................................................................... 210
7.9 Anybus ............................................................................................................................................. 212
7.10 Barcode .......................................................................................................................................... 212
7.10.1 Decimal Separator Numeric.................................................................................................. 212
7.10.2 Displaying the scanned values in the display panel ............................................................ 213
7.10.3 Barcode Selection Filter ........................................................................................................ 214
7.10.4 Barcode Multiscan ................................................................................................................ 217
7.10.5 Print and Output Barcodes.................................................................................................... 223
7.11 Batch processing ........................................................................................................................... 223
7.12 IO control ....................................................................................................................................... 226
7.12.1 Selecting IO modes ............................................................................................................... 226
7.12.2 Outputs................................................................................................................................... 227
7.12.3 Inputs ..................................................................................................................................... 233
7.13 IP sensors ...................................................................................................................................... 237
8. PRINTING ................................................................................................................................ 245
8.1 Standard print images Factory setting ........................................................................................... 245

5
 8.2 Conditions that trigger printing ....................................................................................................... 251
8.3 Configuring the interface for the printer ........................................................................................ 252
8.4 Quick change of print images ......................................................................................................... 252
9. SERVICE ................................................................................................................................... 253
9.1 Error messages................................................................................................................................ 253
9.2 Error list ............................................................................................................................................ 256
9.3 Mirco SD card .................................................................................................................................. 256
9.4 Software update .............................................................................................................................. 257
9.5 Supplementary documentation ...................................................................................................... 258

6
1. GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 Introduction

Thank you for choosing the Soehnle Professional Terminal 3035.

This terminal has been developed according to the requirements of operational practice and offers you
numerous possibilities to adapt the weighing process individually to your needs in order to make your
processes rational and cost-effective.

Please read the operating instructions carefully before use.

Improper use could cause damage to you or the terminal.
If you have any questions or if problems arise on your terminal which are not covered in the operating
instructions, please contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service center or Soehnle Industrial Solutions
customer service.

Phone: +49 7191 3453-220

Fax: +49 7191 3453-211
E-Mail: [email protected]

Further information and documentation can be found at

https://www.soehnle-professional.com/site/documents

Please go to the customer center of our website www.soehnle-professional.com and select

the terminal 3035 under Downloads.

1.2 Intended use

The Soehnle Professional Terminal 3035 is a calibratable terminal for use in scales and weighing systems
with commercially available DMS weighing and load cells.
Up to three analogue measuring points (scales) can be simultaneously connected internally. Externally, a
total of up to 29 measuring points are possible via CAN bus. Another scale can be connected via the serial
interface, e.g. as a reference scale. Additional data can be entered via the keyboard. Various interface
options are available for the connection of printers, EDP, readers, data memory and external PC keyboard.

The Soehnle Professional Terminal 3035 has been designed for effective working even under rough
environmental conditions. It is robust, easy to clean, flexible and fast. Logical structure and user guidance
enable quick familiarization and intuitive work at the terminal. Its design adapts to your individual
requirements and supports you in your task.

7
1.3 Safety instructions

Before using the device, read the information in the user's manual carefully. They contain important
instructions for the installation, proper use and maintenance of the terminal.

The manufacturer is not liable if the following instructions are not observed:

When using electrical components under increased safety requirements, the relevant regulations must be
observed. Never perform service work on the terminal while it is live. Improper installation will void the
warranty.

> The 3035 terminal must not be used in potentially explosive atmospheres.
A special version is available for EX zones 2 and 22
> The permissible mains voltage is 100 - 240 volts. The socket must be earthed and easily
accessible.
> The terminal must only be opened by trained Soehnle Industrial Solutions service technicians.
The housing contains no user-serviceable components. Unauthorized manipulations render the
product warranty null and void.
> Repairs and the replacement or installation of parts may only be carried out by a trained
Soehnle Industrial Solutions service point.
> The terminal must be taken out of service if the power cable is damaged. Disconnect the power
supply and contact a Soehnle Industrial Solutions service location.
> The attached security labels must not be damaged if the terminal is used for functions with
calibration mandate.

Please contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner in case of problems.

1.4 Cleaning

A damp cloth and standard cleaning agents are sufficient for cleaning.
Do not use abrasive and corrosive agents.

1.5 Maintenance and service

Note:
These devices comply with the applicable EC directives 2014/31/EU, 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU and EN45501.
However, under extreme electrostatic as well as electromagnetic influences, e.g. when operating a radio or
mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the devices, the scale may be affected.

After the end of the disturbance, the product can be used as intended again,
If necessary, it may be necessary to switch it on again. In case of permanent electrostatic interference we
recommend grounding at the terminal housing and platform.

The terminal is a measuring instrument. Drafts, vibrations, rapid temperature changes and sunlight can affect
the weighing result. The terminal complies with protection class IP 67. Very high humidity, vapors, aggressive
liquids and heavy soiling must be avoided.

8
1.6 Product Warranty/liability

When a defect in the delivered item is attributable to Soehnle Industrial Solutions, Soehnle Industrial
Solutions is entitled at its discretion to either remedy the defect or to supply a replacement. Replaced parts
become the property of Soehnle Industrial Solutions.

The statutory regulations apply if the defect remedy or replacement delivery fails.

The product warranty period begins on the date of purchase. Please retain the invoice as proof. For service
contact your dealer or the Soehnle Industrial Solutions customer service department.

No liability is assumed, in particular for losses resulting for the following reasons:

Unsuited, inappropriate storage or use, defective assembly and/or startup by the buyer or third parties,
normal wear and tear, modifications or manipulations, deficient or careless treatment, in particular excessive
loads, chemical, electrochemical, electrical influences, or moisture, provided these are not attributable to
Soehnle Industrial Solutions.

The product warranty for the unrestricted overall function of the equipment is null and void if operational,
climatic, or other influences result in a significant change of circumstances or the condition of the material.
When Soehnle Industrial Solutions honors the product warranty on a case-by-case basis, this implies the
absence of defects on the delivered item during the product warranty period. Please keep the original
packaging for any required return shipments.

1.7 Setup instructions

Please inspect the packaging and terminal for external damage. Do not place a visibly damaged terminal into
service, but inform your dealer instead.
Please keep the packaging for any required shipping.

The terminal was designed for rough commercial operations. It is nevertheless a sensitive measurement
instrument whose performance can be influenced by unfavorable environmental conditions.
The unit should be acclimated at ambient temperature for 2 hours after unpacking or transport.
The rated ambient temperature is - 10° to + 40° C.
The setup location is a key factor for the function of your scale.
Select an appropriate setup location to protect the terminal against impact, vibration, excessive heat or cold,
temperature swings, airflow, chemicals, and moisture to ensure that the unit can work fast and reliably over
the long-term.

9
2. DEVICE DESCRIPTION

2.1 Connection and device description

pressure
compensation
membrane

port
port 1

port 2

scale 1
port 3 RS232 / scale 2
scale 3

power supply ground

2.2 Technical data

> Stainless steel housing, protection class IP 67, integrated power supply 100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
optional DC/DC-converter 12 - 60 V
> Membrane keyboard with a total of 32 keys, 6 function keys,
4 organization data keys, alphanumeric input via numeric keypad
> 10 user programs, special programs as option
> Connection possibility for external PC keyboard
> color display TFT 5.7" QVGA, dot matrix 320 x 240 pixels dimmable backlighting
> Option: Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card (high-quality SLC memory card), memory capacity:
Fixed memory for a total of 999 fixed values for all programs, alibi memory for 4 million entries
and for software update
> Interfaces: 1 x RS 232 or USB in the basic version.
> Internal with R232, USB and Ethernet, 2 additional interface slots (RS232)
> Any bus slot for bus interfaces such as Profibus, ProfiNet
> Option: IO card for 6 outputs and 4 inputs freely assignable
> Working temperature: -10° C to +40° C
> 1 measuring point in the basic version, 2 further measuring points can be connected internally, in
total up to
29 measuring points, calibratable resolution 10,000 e, internal resolution 16,000,000 d
> Calibratable according to accuracy class III and IIII for n = 10 000 e for multi-range and
multi-partition scales
> Smallest approved input signal per calibrated value = 0.2 µV,
Load cell impedance 40 Ohms to 1,245 Ohm
> A digital reference scale can be connected via RS-232 interface

10
2.3 Symbols on the display

Symbols in the display toolbar

LOG

Alibi memory use Alibi memory use Alibi memory use

Keyboard lock Data logger
100 80 empty

Multirange 1 Multirange 2 Multirange 3 Resolution X10 Zero

HLD

Hold function active

Symbols in the information field of the display

Exact target
Below tolerance In tolerance value reached
Above tolerance Below minimum load

Above class 5
upper limit

Symbol for standstill

After placing the sample on the scale, the scale needs time to settle.
As long as no standstill has occurred, the dimension sign (kg, g) is hidden.
When the machine has come to a standstill and a stable value is available, this is indicated by the display of
the dimension symbol.

11
2.4 Calibration instructions

The scope of this notice is Germany. In other countries, conformity with national laws must be verified.

The Terminal 3035 is approved for custody transfer class III and IIII within the EU.
It complies with the type described in the type approval and the applicable requirements of Directives
2014/31/EU, 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU and EN 45501.

According to the legal regulations, approved scales must be recalibrated at regular intervals. For this
purpose, please contact a Soehnle Industrial Solutions service center or your local weights and measures
office.
Do not damage the official seals under any circumstances, as this will invalidate the calibration validity.

2.4.1 Name plate

The terminal has an electronic type plate.

Display after pressing the Info key:

2.4.2 Calibration counter

The calibration counter shows how often a scale has been calibrated. The stored counter reading must
correspond to the calibration counter reading secured by adhesive tape. The current calibration counter
reading can be displayed for each connected scale in the setting mode under Scale / Scale parameters.

12
2.5 Switching on / off

Switch on:

Press the ON/OFF key.

When switching on, the logo , terminal type 3035, filter type and the recognized measuring points are
briefly displayed during the start routine.
The scale is set to zero after the power-on process.
When the machine is switched on, the last application program used is switched back on.

Zero setting limits:

Calibratable: Zero setting range 20% of the weighing range,
Default value is -5% to +15% of the weighing range. Optional: extended range on request.
Non-verifiable: the switch-on zero setting range can be -99% to +99% of the weighing range.
If you switch on outside the switch-on zero setting range, the scale displays an error message.
Afterwards the terminal goes directly into the weighing mode if not verifiable, whereas if verifiable, it is
possible to jump to the weighing mode by pressing the zero key. The current weight value with the
previously stored zero point is then displayed. If the cause for under- or overload is removed, the scale goes
to zero without having to be switched on again and is ready for operation.

Backlight and color

Can be adjusted in the setting mode (terminal/display).
The default setting is 80% for the backlight and white for the background color.

Procedure on power failure

When power is restored, the scale returns to the previously exited state.

Switch off

Press the ON/OFF key .

If the connected measuring point is loaded, or if you have called up a menu, the scale only switches off after
pressing the ON/OFF key for 3 seconds.
It is not possible to switch off the scale while it is waiting for an input in the editing area of the setting mode.
To switch off the scale you must leave the editing area.

OFF display
In the setting mode Service (including password request) / General/OFF display, you can set whether the
word "OFF" appears on the display when the scale is switched off (medical directive).
Default setting is "with OFF display".

13
3. OPERATING CONCEPT

The operating concept is divided into two functional areas:

• Setting mode
• Program mode

3.1 Setting mode

Here you make individual settings on the terminal to optimize the scale for your needs.

Menu structure for setup mode:

Setting mode

Program settings Terminal Scale Communication Service

Weighing + taring Version Scales Parameters Alibi memory only for

Allocation table
Totalizing and picking Display Interface 1 RS232(internal) Service
measuring points

Counting Keypad Ref. points f. calib. Interface Port 2

Professionals
internal measuring
Checking Date/Time Interface Port 3
point

Classifiying Organization data USB

Recipes Error memory Ethernet

Weight conversion User password Print image

Vehicle weighbridge Login function EDP settings

I/O port programming Reset Terminal Anybus

SD card
Percentage weighing Barcode
data backup

Volume measurement Batch processing

Dyn. function keys IO control

IP sensors

14
3.2 Program mode

Here you select the desired weighing application program. After selecting and calling the application
program, the scale is ready to weigh.

3.3 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to call up the functions.

These take on different functions depending on the program and situation. The respective
function is shown on the display in the function bar above the key.

Depending on the program, the function keys are assigned to up to 4 levels, and you can scroll through the
levels with the function change key.

Navigation with the function keys

↑ Move the marker up in the list

↓ Move the marker down in the list
End Exiting the setting mode
Continue Call up the marked menu item
Back Return to higher level
AbortReturn without accepting a change
Delete Deleting a position with return
ApplyAcceptance of an entry or change
→ Cursor to the right
← Cursor to the left

3.4 Input and control keys

The following additional keys are available for input and control:

Numeric keys for entering numerical values,

Multiple assignment of the numeric keys for entering letters

Call up organizational data

Deleting the complete input or resetting the functions

Deleting the last digit

15
 Info key, electronic type plate with calibration data,
Calling up information on the application programs

Function change key

Scale change key

Tare key

Reset key / Delete tare

Enter key

Print key

On / Off

Display:
The display shows different views depending on the situation.
It is divided into the following display fields:
Aux. display
NEBENANZEIGE SYMBOLLEISTE
toolbar

INFORMATIONSFELD
informationfiel

display
ANZEIGEFELD

range indicator
BEREICHSANZEIGE

functionba
FUNKTIONSLEISTE

Auxiliary display:
Displays further additional information and can be set individually under Terminal / Display.
Can be switched on and off with the F3 key.
Toolbar:
Shows information on the status of the connected measuring point
Information field:
Shows situation-dependent or individual settings Organizational data, totals when totalizing, special control
characters, classes when classifying, operator guidance, switching points
Display field:
Shows weight value, number of pieces, dimension indicator
Area display:
Displays the current weighing range with Max / Min / e (d).
Function bar:
Functions of the 6 situation-dependent function keys

16
4. SETTING MODE

In the setting mode, program and weighing parameters are stored, which can be called up and individually set
up.
The adjustment is done by data input or selection from predefined parameters.
The individual parameters are stored in logical groups within a multi-level family tree structure.
Info: The modification options may be restricted in legal metrology.

Menu structure of Setting mode:

Setting mode

Program settings Terminal Scale Communication Service

Weighing + taring Version Scales Parameters Alibi memory only for

Allocation table
Totalizing and picking Display Interface 1 RS232(internal) Service
measuring points

Counting Keypad Ref. points f. calib. Interface Port 2

Professionals
internal measuring
Checking Date/Time Interface Port 3
point

Classifiying Organization data USB

Recipes Error memory Ethernet

Weight conversion User password Print image

Vehicle weighbridge Login function EDP settings

I/O port programming Reset Terminal Anybus

SD card
Percentage weighing Barcode
data backup

Volume measurement Batch processing

Dyn. function keys IO control

IP sensors

17
4.1 Starting the setting mode

Switch on the terminal.

After the switch-on routine, the terminal automatically starts the last activated application program. To call
up the setting mode, switch to the setting functions level with the function change key.

Function keys:

Level Setting functions

Secondary Prog Setup

Gross x 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F6 Setting mode key.

You are now in the selection menu Setting mode.

Navigation in setting mode:

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions.
These take on different functions depending on the program and situation.
The respective function is shown on the display in the function bar.

Meaning of the function keys:

↑ Move the marker up in the list
↓ Move the marker down in the list
End Exiting the setting mode
Continue Call up the marked menu item
Back Return to higher level
AbortReturn without accepting a change
Delete Deleting a position with return
ApplyAcceptance of an entry or change
→ Cursor to the right
← Cursor to the left

18
Entries in setting mode:
In most cases you make a selection from the various settings offered.
For editable values, numeric or alphanumeric input is possible via the keyboard.

Service area:
The service area is secured by a password.
The included parameters can only be maintained by trained service personnel.
Please contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service centre.

4.2 Program settings

In the Program Settings setting mode, you can adapt the user programs of your scale to your specific
requirements. The activation of the user programs and their typical use are described in part 6 Application
programs.

1 Weighing and taring

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.5.16

2 Totalizing + picking

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.6.18

3 Counting

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.7.14

4 Controlling

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.8.10

5 Classifying

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.9.10

6 Recipe

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.10.9

7 Neutral measurement

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.11.12

8 Vehicle scale

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.12.9

19
 9 Dynamic switching

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.13.11

10 Percentage weighing

For settings and parameters see chapter 6.14.9

4.3 Setting mode Terminal settings

In setting mode under Terminal, you will find the following query or setting options

1 Version

Boot loader software Software status query

LRS Software AZG Software status query

Application software AZG Query software status and filter type

Serial number central board Requesting the factory-set serial number

Character set Query character set (in later version as selection):

- Latin 1

Output parameters uni. Output of all setting parameters of the terminal including the currently connected
measuring point via the interface with the use "EDV 2 (unidirectional)".

2 Display

Backlighting Input
Luminosity setting, input in percent via numeric keypad
30% is darker, 100% is full brightness
factory setting: 80%

Background colour Selection

Setting background colour
> green
> white
> light blue
> yellow
> blue
> magenta
> red
Factory setting: white

Language Selection
1st language German (factory setting)
2nd language English or other languages
can be adapted via the Soehnle Professional service program.

20
2 Display

Secondary display Selection

> Second unit
> tare value
> x10 resolution
> Gross/net
> Current weight
> reference quantity
> reference weight
> setpoint value
> Difference to setpoint
> Specific weight
> Car registration number
> Weight first/individual weighing
> Traffic light display
> volume
> Sensor connection status
> Last determined. Quantity
Factory setting: Second unit

Decimal Separation Selection

comma, dot or none
Factory setting: comma

Thousand separator piece Selection

for separators only for count quantity display
comma, dot or none
Factory setting: None

3 Keyboard

Keypad lock On the keyboard, you can lock individual, multiple or all keys.
By pressing the key to be locked, you can change the status of the key from open
to locked and vice versa.
Press the Enter key for 3 seconds to save and exit.

Key beep Selection from or on

Keyboard confirmation beep
Factory setting: off

Receipt beep Selection from or on

Acknowledgement beep (e.g. error message or acceptance)
Factory setting: off

Keyboard layout Choice of German or French

Layout for PC - Keyboard layout and keyboard looping via the USB interface
Factory setting: German

21
4 Date / Time

Time Enter using the numeric keypad, the clock starts running Key Accept

Date Input via numeric keypad

Date format Selection European or imperial date

Factory setting: European

Numeric Keypad Entry in days [d].

Shelf life (days)
Factory setting: 0 d

5 Organizational data

Designation ORG A Input

Name of the organization data memory A
Numbers or plain text via keyboard, e.g. "Article no." max. 12 characters

Designation ORG B Input

Name of the organization data memory B
Numbers or plain text via keyboard, max. 12 characters

Designation ORG C Input

Name of the organization data memory C
Numbers or plain text via keyboard, max. 12 characters

Designation ORG D Input

Name of the organization data memory D
Numbers or plain text via keyboard, max. 12 characters

22
5 Organizational data

Fixed values Organizational Selection of existing fixed values from the database
data A Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

Edit an existing fixed value from the database

Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter number is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha
keyboard. Confirm the entry with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Back)
Parameter Entry is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha
keyboard. Confirm the entry with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Back)

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Create new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in
brackets indicates the free memory locations, the second number indicates the
occupied memory locations.
Parameter number is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha
keyboard. Confirm the entry with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)
Parameter Entry is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, enter the entry 1 to 6 with the
numeric/alpha keyboard. Confirm the entry with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)

Exiting the database

Press the F5 back key to exit the list.

Note: the optional Micro SD card (alibi memory) is required to use the fixed values

Fixed values Organizational Like fixed values org. data A

data B

Fixed values org. data C Like fixed values org. data A

Fixed values org. data D Like fixed values org. data A

Fixed value Call Selection whether the fixed value is called up via consecutive memory location
number or article number.
Factory setting: Article number

23
6 Error memory

Error list Query the error list with position, date, time of the last error, number of errors, error
number and description. Scroll back with arrow keys or F5.

Protocol memory Query the list of the download log memory with position, date, time, code no. and
description. Scroll back with arrow keys or F5.

Last message from the PLC Query the list with the last communication information of the Anybus interface
Profibus or Profinet

Last Profinet module cmd. Query of the last commands from the Profinet module

Error n. Message continues Selection on or off

to display Factory setting: off

7 User password

Create / Change Alphanumeric input

Password with up to 8 characters via keyboard
After activation, access to the setting mode and program selection is only possible
by entering the correct password.
If you forget your password, entering CLEAR will give you access once.

Delete Deletes the password and releases access again

8 Login function

Activation Selection on or off

Factory setting: off

Password request Selection on or off

Factory setting: off

Create/change password Enter the internal terminal password

Line alphanumerically via the numeric keypad.
Password with up to 35 characters.
After activation, access is via a password query, e.g. after switching on the
terminal or after logging off by pressing the
C - key for 3 seconds.

Clear password Press F6 Next to delete the password

Enter login text Entering the login query text

alphanumerically via the numeric keypad.
Text length up to 35 characters.

9 Reset Terminal

Reset Terminal Execute selection or do not execute

Execute deletes all individual settings of the terminal and resets to the factory
settings. Scale parameters, read-only memory and the print image are not reset.

24
10 SD card data backup

Import By pressing F6 Next, the current user settings are loaded from the micro SD card.
The security question Import with YES or NO is displayed. No data will be loaded.

Export By pressing F6 Next, the current user settings are saved on the micro SD card.

Export for automatic import By pressing F6 Next the current user settings are saved on the micro SD card and
in case of a software problem the setting parameters are automatically reloaded.

11 Volume measurement

Measurement active Selection on or off

Actuation Volume measurement function with the function key for manual entry of
the axis values X | Y | Z and display in the information field.
Factory setting: off

Display volume weight Selection on or off

Activation of the additional display volume weight and divisor in the information
field.
Factory setting: off

Volume Divisor Input of the divisor

for calculating the volume weight, value is numeric from 1.000 to 10.000 via the
numeric keypad.
Factory setting: 5.000

12 Dyn. function keys

switch on/off Selection on or off

Actuation and display of the assigned dynamic function keys.
Assignment and execution of the function is via the EDP interface and requires a
Soehnle SD card (alibi memory).
Factory setting: off

Read file Input file name for dynamic function keys

During start-up, the file with the name is automatically read from the SD card when
the dynamic function keys are activated.
Factory setting: FKD1.txt

Write file Input file name for dynamic function keys

Saving and backing up the file dynamic function keys on the SD card.
Factory setting: FKD1.txt

25
4.4 Setting mode Scale settings

The first step is to select the scale (measuring point) with the scale change key,
for which you want to configure settings.
Only connected and active scales (measuring points) are displayed for selection.
The settings and queries are made individually for each scale (measuring point).
All setting and query options are identical for all scales (measuring points).
In the setting mode under Scale, you will find the following query or setting options

1 Scales Parameters

Calibration meter reading Query

the current value of the calibration counter

Legal for trade Query off or onNote

: Verifiable may mean limited selection if parameter settings contain options
relevant to verification.
Selection only possible in the service area, subject to calibration

Filter setting Selection

> Service setting (direct modification of the filters in the service area possible)
> Live cattle scale
> Quiet
> Normal
> restless
Factory setting: Service setting
Function of the selection is only possible with the release of User filter setting in
the service area.

Holdmode Selection
> not active: No hold function
> Still/key: Hold at standstill outside zero setting range,
Cancel by power-on key
> Still/empty: Hold at standstill outside zero setting range,
Cancel by releasing the scale
> Max/key: Hold at maximum reached value,
Cancel by pressing the on key
> Max/empty: Hold at maximum reached value,
Cancel by releasing the scale
> drag / key: Hold when the weight is increased and standstill,
Cancel by power-on key
> tow/empty: Hold when weight is increased and standstill,
Cancel by releasing the scale
Factory setting: not active

Zero tracking Query off or on off: no zero tracking on: correction of drift of scale to zero
zero tracking calibratable: 0.5 d/s
zero tracking not calibratable: 2 d/s
Selection only possible in the service area, subject to calibration

26
1 Scales Parameters

Switch-on zeroing Query off or on

When on, the scale is set within the zero setting limit of the weighing range zero
Selection only possible in the service area, subject to calibration.

Autotara Selection off or on: No autotare on: Automatically tares the first weight value
above the empty signal after stability on the scale
Factory setting: off

Tare summing Selection off or on: New tare overwrites old tare on: new tare adds new tare to
existing tare
Please note: The function Tare totalizing on influences tare sequences and
totalisations. The description in the manual always refers to the setting Tare
totalizing off.
Factory setting: off

Second unit Selection

>g
>t
> lb
> mg
> oz
Can be activated as secondary display function on the display by pressing key F3
secondary display in weighing mode.
In the selection the adjusted unit is not shown as the first unit.

Empty message Input

of the range in which the empty signal is given as a percentage of the weighing
range.
Input via the numeric keypad in percent.
(Info: Empty message is not shown on the display).
Factory setting: 0.10 %.

Control mode Enquiry or input off or on switches a 10-fold higher resolution constantly on in the
display and deactivates the x10 key.
Only possible with non-verifiable scales.

Serial number MS Query of the serial number measuring point (MS)

Software version MS Query the software status of the measuring point (MS)

27
For 6 measuring point numbers hardware addressing (system) new user measuring point numbers (user) can
be assigned variably.
Select the desired system address Sys: xx with the arrow keys, then press F6 Continue to enter the desired
new user address Use: xx, then press F6 Apply.
For the user address Use: 00, the machine address is automatically used.
Multiple assignment of the same measuring point numbers is possible.

2 Allocation table measuring points

Sys: 01Use : 10 System no. 01 User no. 10 (new measuring points no. = 10)
Sys: 02Use : 00 System no. 02 User no. 00 (measuring points no. = 02)
Sys: 00Use : 00 System No. 00 User No. 00
Sys: 00Use : 00 System No. 00 User No. 00
Sys: 00Use : 00 System No. 00 User No. 00
Sys: 00Use : 00 System No. 00 User No. 00

Querying the calibration and adjustment points helps service personnel to check the scale.

3 Adjustment bases

Current raw measured value Query of the current raw measured value (variable depending on the load on the
scale)

Zero point raw measured Query of the adjusted raw measured value from the zero point
value

support point 1 weight value Query of the weight value from 1 base point

Base point 1 raw measured Query of the adjusted raw measured value from 1 base point
value

Support point 2 Weight value Query of the weight value of the 2 support point

Base point 2 Raw measured Query of the adjusted raw measured value from the 2 base point
value

Support point 3 Weight value Query of the weight value of the 3 support point

Base point 3 Raw measured Query of the adjusted raw measured value from the 3 base point
value

Support point 4 Weight value Query of the weight value of the 4 support point

Base point 4 Raw measured Query of the adjusted raw measured value from the 4 base point
value

The internal measuring point is on the central board of the terminal 3035 with the measuring point number
01.

4 internal measuring point

Operating status Query or selection from or on

With off, the internal measuring point is deactivated with on, measuring point 01 is
active.
Factory setting: on

28
4.5 Setting Mode Communication Settings

In setting mode under Communication, you will find the following query or setting options

1 Alibi memory

Memory size Query

Memory size 4.000.000 = 100%
(display only with integrated and activated alibi memory)

Fill level Query

of the currently occupied fill level incl. percentage display (e.g. 162 = 0%)

Search (single entry) Search

Single entry by entering a consecutive number

Search function Search

Multiple entries by entering the oldest and youngest consecutive number

Search (additional field) Search

Single entry via input Contents of additional field

Use additional field Selection

> none
> barcode
> Organizational data A
> Organizational data B
> Organizational data C
> Organizational data D
> Date/Time
> Price labelling (special software)

Interface 1 RS232 (internal)

2
(For further details see also interface description 470.508.090)

Use Interface Selection

> none
> 2795.14
> 2795.12+2795.20
> EDP
> EDV 2 (unidirectional)
> barcode
> Second/large display
> Digital scale
If you are already using this function via another interface output, this selection
position is shown as blocked.
Factory setting: 2795.14

Baud rate Selection

> 1200
> 2400
> 4800
> 9600
> 19200
> 38400
Factory setting: 9600

29
2 Interface 1 RS232 (internal)

Data bits Selection

>7
>8
Factory setting: 8

Parity Selection
> none
> even
> odd
Factory setting: none

Xon/Xoff Selection
off or on
Factory setting: off

Factory setting Selection

Do not execute: Individual settings on the interface are retained
Execute: Resets interface to factory settings

Interface Port 2
3
(For further details see also interface description 470.508.090)

Use Interface Selection

> none
> 2795.14
> 2795.12+2795.20
> EDP
> EDV 2 (unidirectional)
> barcode
> Second/large display
> Digital scale
If you are already using this function via another interface output, this selection
position is shown as blocked.
Factory setting: none

Baud rate Selection

> 1200
> 2400
> 4800
> 9600
> 19200
> 38400
Factory setting: 9600

Data bits Selection

>7
>8
Factory setting: 8

Parity Selection
> none
> even
> odd
Factory setting: none

30
3 Interface Port 2

Xon/Xoff Selection
off or on
Factory setting: off

Factory setting Selection

Do not execute: Individual settings on the interface are retained
Execute: Resets interface to factory settings

Interface Port 3
4
(For further details see also interface description 470.508.090)

Use Interface Selection

> none
> 2795.14
> 2795.12+2795.20
> EDP
> EDV 2 (unidirectional)
> barcode
> Second/large display
> Digital scale
If you are already using this function via another interface output, this selection
position is shown as blocked.
Factory setting: none

Baud rate Selection

> 1200
> 2400
> 4800
> 9600
> 19200
> 38400
Factory setting: 9600

Data bits Selection

>7
>8
Factory setting: 8

Parity Selection
> none
> even
> odd
Factory setting: none

Xon/Xoff Selection
off or on
Factory setting: off

Factory setting Selection

Do not execute: Individual settings on the interface are retained
Execute: Resets interface to factory settings

31
 USB
5
(For further details see also interface description 470.508.090)

Use USB Selection

> none
> 2795.14
> 2795.12+2795.20
> EDP
> EDV 2 (unidirectional)
> PC keyboard
> Keyboard looping
> Data logger
If you are already using this function via another interface output, this selection
position is shown as blocked.
Factory setting: none

Ethernet
6
(For further details see also interface description 470.508.090)

Use Ethernet Selection

> none
> EDP
If you are already using this function via another interface output, this selection
position is shown as blocked.
Factory setting: none

IP address Input
IP address
Werkseinstellung: 010.010.005.005

Subnet Mask Input

Subnet Mask
Werkseinstellung: 255.255.255.000

Gateway Input
Standard gateway
Werkseinstellung: 010.010.005.012

IP port Input
IP port
Factory setting: 23

MAC address Query

the MAC address

Disable MAC address bypass Selection

off or onAutomatic
transmission of UDP-MAB message for recognition of our scale (contents see
setting mode (User Mode) 470.702.112)
Factory setting: off

Unit designation Input

the name of the machine to uniquely identify it on the network.
Factory setting: without input

32
7 Print image

Query expression (OK) Selection on or off.

If on, you will be asked after each printout whether the print was OK.
If the answer is no, the print is repeated until OK is confirmed.
Factory setting: off.

Printout at G+T = 0 Selection on or off.

Off: No printout when scale is empty
Factory setting: on

Decimal separator Selection

comma, dot or none
Factory setting: comma

thousand separator Selection

comma, dot or none
Factory setting: None

Suppressing unity Selection on or off.

out: Unit is not suppressed.
Factory setting: off

running time NumberPrint Input

key The number for the first print image can be entered here. If the value zero is
entered, the function is not active. Starting at number 1, the value is incremented
by one after each output via the print key.

Delete values after printing Input

Operation according to interface description 470.508.090

Factory setting Selection

Do not execute: Individual settings of the print image setting are retainedExecute
: Resets print image settings to factory settings

EDP settings
8
(For further details see also interface description 470.508.090)

IT Fashion Selection for EDP mode (terminal automatically triggers the selected data record)
> none
> A: Send data record 1 x immediately
> B: Send data set 1 x change/withdrawal
> C: Send data record Änd./Still.
> D: Send data record Änd./Still./> empty
> E: Send data record Änd./Still./<Leer/>Leer
> F: Send data set running
> G: Send data set 3005 running
> H: Send data set 1 x at breastfeeding
Factory setting: none

33
8 EDP settings

EDP data set Selection for the format of the data record
> EDP print image (variable)
> EDV data record S20
> EDP data. 2790 as v2.10
> EDP data record Easylog
Factory setting: EDP print image (variable)
Selection EDP print image variable is the default setting according to the interface
description 470.508.090 or can be freely configured via the service software.

EDP data record autom. <I> Selection

off or on
Factory setting: off
(at on, the data record with the print image <I> is automatically sent via the EDP
interface after each standstill, layout print image <I> via service software required)

EDV Mode unidirectional Selection for EDP mode unidirectional (terminal automatically triggers the selected
data record)
> none
> A: Send data record 1 x immediately
> B: Send data set 1 x change/withdrawal
> C: Send data record Änd./Still.
> D: Send data record Änd./Still./> empty
> E: Send data record Änd./Still./<Leer/>Leer
> F: Send data set running
> G: Send data set 3005 running
> H: Send data set 1 x at breastfeeding
Factory setting: none

Time pattern data packets Input

Time interval for data packets via interface
Input via numeric keypad in ms
Factory setting: 100 ms

Decimal separator Selection

comma, dot or none
Factory setting: comma

thousand separator Selection

comma, dot or none
Factory setting: None

Locking remote control Selection (currently without function, implementation in later expansion stage)
or a
Factory setting: off

EDP with STX-ETX Selection

off or on
Factory setting: off

Factory setting Selection

Do not execute: Individual EDP settings are retained
Execute: Resets computer settings to factory defaults

34
 Anybus
9 (For further details, see also the description Communication Profinet Profibus
470.508.095)

Fieldbus type Selection

> not active
> Profibus DP
> Profinet
Factory setting: not active

Address Input
Address only for Profibus application, numeric via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 0

Anybus module cycle time Input

of the cycle time numerically via numeric keypad in milliseconds.
Factory setting: 50 ms

10 Barcode (for further details see chapter 7.10)

Decimal separator Num. Selection from or on

Factory setting: on

Display timer barcode Input

Time insertion Barcode numeric via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 2500 ms

Selection Filtering No. Input

Numerical filter number via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 1

Control character filter no. 01 Input

Code Control character numeric via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 0

First position filter no. 01 Input

Start filter position numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 1

Last position filter no. 01 Input

End filter position numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 70

Multiscan Quantity Input

the number of multiple scans from 0 to 4 using the numeric keypad
Factory setting: 0

Code 1.scan (ORGA) Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Code 2.scan (ORGB) Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

35
10 Barcode (for further details see chapter 7.10)

Code 3.Scan (ORGC) Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Code 4.Scan (ORGD) Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Multiscan Timer Input

of the time using the numeric keypad of the multiple scans for barcode capture; if
this time is exceeded, the Miltiscan is aborted and no captured barcode content is
set.
Factory setting: 2500 ms

Filter for Scan (ORGA) Input

of the first three positions of the scan content for ORGA Scan possible. Filtering
enables the clear allocation to the ORGA memory, so that the order of the scan
processes is not important for multiscan. Possible entries are A-Z for letters, 0-9
for numbers and special characters, which can be entered via the keypad of the
3035 terminal.
Factory setting: - | - | -

Filter for Scan (ORGB) As Filter for Scan (ORGA) valid for Filter for Scan (ORGB)

Filter for Scan (ORGC) As Filter for Scan (ORGA) valid for Filter for Scan (ORGC)

Filter for Scan (ORGD) As Filter for Scan (ORGA) valid for Filter for Scan (ORGD)

36
11 Batch processing (for further details see chapter 7.11)

Batch code 1 Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Batch code 2 Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Batch code 3 Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Batch code 4 Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Batch code 5 Input

Control commands from the interface description 3035 (document 470.508.090E)
Factory setting: 0

Batch code 1 parameter Selection

Source > no parameter
> ORGA memory
> ORGB memory
> ORGC memory
> ORGD memory
> Barcode memory
> Barcode buffer
Factory setting: no parameter

Batch code 2 parameters Same as batch code 1 parameter Source

Source

Batch code 3 parameters Same as batch code 1 parameter Source

Source

Batch code 4 parameters Same as batch code 1 parameter Source

Source

Batch code 5 parameters Same as batch code 1 parameter Source

Source

Batch activation key Selection

> no key
> Print key
> Enter key
Factory setting: no key

37
11 Batch processing (for further details see chapter 7.11)

Pause between batch code 1- Input

2 Time for the pause between the batch codes, numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 100 ms

Pause between batch code 2- Input

3 Time for the pause between the batch codes, numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 100 ms

Pause between batch code 3- Input

4 Time for the pause between the batch codes, numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 100 ms

Pause between batch code 4- Input

5 Time for the pause between the batch codes, numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 100 ms

Break after the end Input

Time for the pause at the end, numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 100 ms

12 IO control (for further details see chapter 7.12)

IO operating mode Selection

> off
>a
> on, safety function
Factory setting: off

Outputs Selection for the assignment of the individual switching points

> Switching point S1
> Switching point S2
> Switching point S3
> Switching point S4
> switching point S5
> switching point S6
Factory setting: all not active

Entrances Selection for the assignment of the individual inputs

> Input E1
> Input E2
> Input E3
> Input E4
Factory setting: all not active

38
13 IP sensors (for further details see chapter 7.13)

Sensor number Input

Selection of the sensor number 1 to 4 for the query and setting of the following
parameters. At present only 1 sensor is possible, in case of later hardware
expansion up to 4 sensors are possible.
Factory setting: 1

Activation Selection
> off
>a
Factory setting: off

Connection status Query

the connection status e.g. connected

Manufacturer Selection
> other manufacturer
> Sick
> Balluff
> ifm electronic
Factory setting: other manufacturer

Sensor type Selection

> generic sensor
> RFID sensor
> Volume sensor
Factory setting: generic sensor

IP address of the sensor Input

IP address when the sensor is a server (host).
Werkseinstellung: 010.010.005.005

IP port Input
IP port
Factory setting: 10001

3035 Socket type Selection

> Client
> Server
Factory setting: Client

Interface Mode Selection

> read manually
> spontaneous information
Factory setting: spontaneous information

RFID/generic action Selection

> Simulate K-Command
> Simulate Barcode
> save in ORGA
> save in ORGB
> save in ORGC
> save in ORGD
> K-command batch function
> store only in receive puf.
Factory setting: Simulate K-command

39
 13 IP sensors (for further details see chapter 7.13)

max. waiting time a. Data Input

max. waiting time for data in milliseconds
Factory setting: 4000

End of gen. Sensor data Selection

>0
> CR
> LF
> ETX
Factory setting: 0

Ignore escape character '/ Selection

> off
>a
Factory setting: off

4.6 Setting mode Settings Service

The service area is secured by a password.

The included parameters can only be maintained by trained service personnel.

4.7 Reset Terminal

In order to reset all settings (except scale parameters and service area) of the terminal to the factory
settings, you can reset the terminal in the setting mode / Terminal / Reset Terminal by making a selection
and pressing function key F6 Continue.

40
5. BASIC FUNCTIONS

5.1 Switching on

For a detailed description of how to switch on the terminal, refer to chapter 2.5 on page 13.

5.2 Switching off

For a detailed description of how to switch off the terminal, refer to chapter 2.5 on page 13.

5.3 Program selection

Selection among the available application programs.

Switch to the setting function level with the function change key.

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F5 Program key.

You can now choose from 10 different application programs.
Select a program: Key F3 arrow up / Key F4 arrow down
Start the selected program: Press F6 Accept.

Information on all user programs in chapter 6.

5.4 Zeroing

Zeroing corrects small deviations from the zero point, e.g. due to contamination of the scale.
Press the zeroing key .

The following symbol appears in the toolbar when the display is zero:

Zero setting range calibratable and non calibratable: -1 to +3% of weighing range.
If zeroing is not possible, the error message "Above zero setting range" or "Below zero setting range" appears
for two seconds.

Zero tracking
Zero tracking automatically corrects small deviations from the zero display.
In the setting mode under scale / scale parameters the zero tracking can be switched on or off (on = 0.5
d/sec calibratable and 2d/sec non calibratable).

41
5.5 Tare function

Tare is the delta of gross and net weights

You will find a detailed description of taring in the Weighing and Taring application program
Chapter 6.5.

5.6 Gross display

Display of the gross weight when the scale is tared

Switch to the setting function level with the function change key.

Aux. Prog- Once.

Gross x 10
display ram Mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F1 Gross key.

As long as you keep the key pressed, the display shows the gross weight with the message Gross.

5.7 Scale switching

Switching between several connected scales.

Up to three analogue measuring points can be installed in the display unit 3035 or a total of up to 29
measuring points can be connected. In addition, a digital scale can be connected via the RS232 interface
with the measuring point no. 30. Switching between the connected measuring points can be done manually
or automatically.

Manual switching:

Press the key briefly. The connected measuring points are connected one after the other.

Press and hold the key.

An input field opens; the measuring point number can be entered and accepted directly.

Automatic changeover: For a description, see the Counting program in Chapter 6.7.9.
In the display, the number of the connected measuring point appears in the symbol bar on the right.

The data of the connected measuring point can be displayed with the Info key sequence. With the key
combination Info/ scale changeover, the data of other connected measuring points can be viewed in
sequence.
The following data is displayed:
> Max, Min, e (d)
> Serial number measuring point (additional if activated)
> Calibration counter
> Identification chip (additional if activated)

42
5.8 Tenfold display x10

Shows the weight value with another decimal in 10 times higher resolution.
Switch to the setting function level with the function change key.

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F2 x10 key.

Approvable scales
If the scale has been calibrated as verifiable, the tenfold higher resolution appears as long as the x10 key is
held down. After the key is released, the x10 display switches off after 5 seconds.

Non-approvable scales
If the scale is not calibrated for use in legal metrology, the tenfold higher resolution appears constantly in the
display. Pressing the key, switches on the tenfold higher resolution. Pressing another key switches the
tenfold higher resolution off again.

As long as the tenfold higher display is switched on, X10 appears in the symbol bar. When the machine is
turned off, the function is disabled.

In the setting mode, you can set the tenfold higher display to be constantly displayed for one weighbridge.
The function setting mode/scale/scale parameters/control mode/on switches the x10 display constantly on
and deactivates the x10 key.
Prerequisite: Scale is not approvable. The factory setting is "Function off".

43
5.9 Hold function

In setting mode, a hold function can be activated separately for each connected measuring point (setting
mode/scales/scale parameters/hold mode)

The following hold functions are available:

> Disabled: Hold is deactivated

> Still/key: Hold at standstill outside empty signal,
Cancel by pressing the on key
> Still/Empty: Hold at standstill outside empty signal,
Cancel by releasing the scale
> Max/Key: Hold at maximum reached value with standstill outside empty signal,
higher weight sets a new hold, lift with on key
> Max/Empty: Hold at maximum reached value with standstill outside empty signal,
higher weight sets new hold, lifting by relieving the scale
> drag / key: Hold each time the weight is increased without stability outside empty signal,
higher weight sets new hold,
Cancel by pressing the on key
> Drag/Empty: Hold every time the weight is increased without standstill outside empty signal,
higher weight sets new hold,
Cancel by releasing the scale.

The function is effective in all application programs.

To activate the selected hold function setting, the terminal must first be restarted.

When the hold function is activated, holding a weight value in the toolbar is indicated by the HLD symbol in
the toolbar.

44
5.10 Secondary display

Shows supplemental information, such as second units, weight values when counting, differences from the
setpoint, etc.

Activating and deactivating the secondary display

Switch to the setting function level with the function change key.

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F3 Auxiliary display key.

Selection of the second unit

Secondary display enabled.

Setting the secondary display

To set the function of the secondary display, first switch the display on with the function change key
to the Setting functions level.

Aux. Prog- Once.

Gross x 10
display ram Mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F6 Setting mode key.

Use the arrow keys F3 and F4 to move to the item Terminal in the list and select it by pressing the F6
Continue key.

Now move to the display with the arrow keys and select it with the F6 Next key.

Now select the submenu Secondary display by pressing the arrow keys and the F6 key "Next".

45
When you call up the sub-menu Secondary display, a list of possible applications is displayed:

You can move around in the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4

Functions of the secondary display

The following function states can be set in the submenu Secondary display:
> Second unit
> Tare value
> x10 resolution
> Gross/net
> Current weight>
Reference quantity
> Reference weight
> setpoint value
> Difference to setpoint
> Specific weight
> Car registration number
> Weight first/individual weighing
> Traffic light display
> Volume
> Sensor connection status
> Last determined. Quantity
Note: the setting of the function must correspond to the user program!
The factory setting of the slave display is the second unit.

46
5.10.1 Second unit

The second unit is defined in the setting mode for each connected scale. The following second units are
stored as standard:

Adjusted unit Second unit

kg g

g kg

The following units are available for individual set-up:

Unit Abbreviation Conversion into g
gram/kilogram g /kg 1 g /1,000 g
Tons t 1.000.000 g
Pounds lb 453,59237 g
Milligram mg 0,001 g
Ounce oz 28,349523125 g

To select the second unit, switch to the setting function level with the function change key.

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F6 Setting mode key.

Use the arrow keys F3 and F4 to move in the list to Scale and press the F6 key to select Continue.

Then select parameters by pressing the F6 key.

47
Use the arrow keys F3 and F4 to move to Second Unit in the list and select it by pressing F6 Next.

You can move around the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. With F6 "Enter", the second unit is defined.

After selecting the second unit, press F1 End to return to the weighing mode.

48
5.11 Organizational data (identifier)

Organizational data are used to assign identification features when documenting weighing operations, e.g.
article number, address, customer, supplier, scale operator.
They are available in all application programs.

The 3035 display unit has 4 organization data memories.

Each memory has
> a freely selectable designation, e.g. "Article no." or multi-line applications such as "Address" (up to 12
characters, database up to 18 characters).
> a freely selectable content e.g. "1234" (up to 35 characters, database 6 lines with 35 characters each).

The designation is entered in the setting mode, the contents at the respective weighing. The designation and
contents can be entered alphanumerically with the numeric keypad.

Four keys to are available for accessing the organization data memories.

Name Content

Input Name
First, enter the names (up to 12 characters) for the required organizational data memories in the setting
mode:
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to select organizational data, F6 Next.
Designation A ORG to D ORG can now be called up and the designation assigned in the input field.
Attention!
An organization data memory is only activated when a designation is assigned! Only activated organization
data memories can be called up with the keys A ORG to D ORG.
In the application programs, depending on the setting of the Information box display under Program settings,
the names of all activated organizational data memories are then displayed in the information box.

49
Input Content
In Weighing mode, press the appropriate Org key to enter the contents for the organization data memories.
Enter the content data alphanumerically using the keypad
(max. 35 characters). Press the F6 key to confirm your entry.
The name and content are now added to the weighing result for identification.
The contents of the organization data memory are retained until they are overwritten or deleted.

Printout
The keys "A Org", "B Org", "C Org" and "D Org" are used in conjunction with key F6 to trigger printing if a print
image is stored. Only organizational data containing an entry are printed out.

Displaying the content

Press the appropriate ORG key.

Deleting the content

Press the appropriate ORG key, then press the CL key, then press the F6 key to accept or press the CL key to
delete all ORG data terminals (ORGA to ORGD) from the working memory.

Database for organizational data

The use of the database for organizational data is only possible with an optional Soehnle Professional Micro-
SD card. Contents that are called up frequently can be stored as fixed values in a database and called up as
required. This saves the repeated manual entry of product designations, operators etc.
Example: "Article" has already been created as the name for the org data memory A.
In Fixed values Orgdata A you now enter the articles to be recorded such as "Screws", "Nuts", "Washers",
"Dowels" etc.
"Operator" has already been created as the name for the org. data memory B.
In Fixed values Org. data B you now enter the possible operators such as "Schmidt", "Müller", "Meier",
"Krause" etc. as entries.
The fixed values can now be activated from the database at any time with a few simple steps.

Call up the database for entering and editing the fixed values
Direct access by pressing the Info key and the corresponding ORG key.
Or you can call the setting mode by pressing F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 to continue.
Use the arrow key F4 to select organizational data, F6 to continue.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark fixed values for org. data, F6 to continue.
You can create individual fixed values for each of the four organ data memories.
There are 999 memory spaces available for fixed values (Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card (high-quality
SLC memory card) required).
Each memory location has organizational data:
> three-digit consecutive memory location number
> freely selectable number (alphanumeric 18 characters)
> Entry 1 (alphanumeric 35 characters)
> Entry 2 (alphanumeric 35 characters)
> Entry 3 (alphanumeric 35 characters)
> Entry 4 (alphanumeric 35 characters)
> Entry 5 (alphanumeric 35 characters)
> Entry 6 (alphanumeric 35 characters)

50
Selection of existing fixed values from the database
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4,
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit

Edit an existing fixed value from the database

Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value
Parameter number is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha keyboard. Confirm the entry with
F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Back.)
Mark the relevant parameter entry, call it up with F6 Edit, input with the numeric/alpha keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Back.)

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Create new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in brackets indicates the free
memory locations, the second number indicates the occupied memory locations.
Parameter number is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha keyboard. Confirm the entry with
F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Mark the relevant parameter entry, call it up with F6 Edit, input with the numeric/alpha keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).

Exiting the database

Press the F5 back key to exit the list.

Database maintenance via optional Soehnle Professional user software 3035

For the requirement of a simple and multiple application for the maintenance of the Org-database for the
designations and contents there is the PC - user software 3035.
The user software is connected to the PC via the RS232, USB or Ethernet computer interface using the
respective connection cable. In addition to the Windows-based user software, the Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet software is also required.

Open database to use the fixed values

Recall the desired organization data memory with the ORGA - ORGD key.
Press the F1 key Database. Select from the list:
Scroll with the arrow keys, call the desired fixed value with F6 Accept.
Direct access via memory location or article number.
Enter the memory location or item number with the numeric keypad to call up the corresponding fixed value.
You can define whether you want to call up by memory location or article number in the setting mode under
Terminal / Organizational data / Fixed values Call

Display the content for the complete multiline database entry

Recall the desired organization data memory with the ORGA - ORGD key.
Press the F2 Info lines key to display the currently active memory contents in full.

51
5.12 Alphanumeric input

The combined keypad can be used to make alphanumeric entries. As an option, the USB interface and the
USB adapter cable for PC keyboard 2550.03.027 can be used to simplify input via a USB PC keyboard.

Types of input fields

Display fields without write capability
Display/write fields with possibility of numerical input
Display/write fields with possibility of alphanumeric input

Activating the input fields

Depending on the situation by means of function keys or direct numerical input. The Input view is displayed.
Existing values are displayed.
The name of the input field is displayed in the toolbar. A dimension sign is displayed if the input refers to a
dimension.

Input procedure

Numerical fields
You can enter the numbers 0 to 9 directly using the numeric keypad.
The registration is right-aligned. A cursor flashes under the last digit entered.
The C key deletes the digit marked with the cursor, the CL key or the Delete function key deletes the entire
entry. The Cancel key terminates the input without saving new input values; existing values are retained.
Press the Apply key to accept the entered value and switch the application program back on.
The specification of whether a full stop, comma or no decimal separation is set in the setting mode
Display/Decimal Separation. The input field can only contain up to the specified number of characters; no
further entries are displayed and are not accepted.

Alphanumeric fields
You can enter the numbers 0 to 9 directly using the numeric keypad.
The entry is left-aligned. The numeric keys are also assigned letters in upper case and special characters. In
addition, the special character keys (,. /) and (+-) are available.
If you press a numeric key within one second of pressing it again, the characters assigned to the key are
activated in a rolling sequence. If no further key is pressed within one second, the character you called is
accepted and the cursor moves one position further.
Numbers can be entered directly one after the other without waiting time as long as a number is not called
several times in succession. A cursor blinks under the position to be entered.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor.
The C key deletes the last character to the left of the cursor or the character under which the cursor is
flashing, the CL key deletes the entire entry.
The Cancel key terminates the input without accepting new input values; existing values are retained. Press
the Apply key to accept the entered value and switch the application program back on. You can only enter up
to the specified number of characters in the input field; further entries overwrite the last character. All
alphanumeric entries can also be made with the optional external PC keyboard.

52
5.13 Key lock

On the keyboard, you can lock individual, multiple or all keys.

Locking the keys

In setting mode, select Terminal / Keypad / Keypad lock.
The keypad is shown schematically on the display. By pressing the key, you can now change the status of the
key from open to locked and vice versa.

Display view Key lock

Locked keys are marked with a cross in the display.

Accept and activate the lock by pressing the Enter key for 3 seconds.
The locked keys are now deactivated and the key lock icon appears on the toolbar.
The key lock is retained even after the machine is switched off.

Key lock enabled.

Remove key lock

In setting mode, select Terminal / Keypad / Keypad lock.
The display shows a schematic representation of the keypad. Locked keys are marked with a cross in the
display. The status of the key can now be changed from locked to open and vice versa by pressing the key.
Accept and activate the change by pressing the Enter key for 3 seconds.
If no more keys are locked, the key lock symbol in the toolbar disappears.

Info: If access to the setting mode is no longer possible by locking keys, then this access can be restored by
pressing the F1 and F6 key combination for 5 seconds. However, this does not unlock the keys, but only
temporarily overrides them for access to setting mode. After leaving the setting mode, the key lock is
reactivated.

53
5.14 User Password

Access to the setting mode and program selection can be blocked by assigning an individual password to
prevent changes by unauthorised persons.

In the setting mode, call up Terminal / User Password

> Select Create/Change, in the input field that opens you can enter an alphanumeric password of up to
8 characters, then press F6 to accept it.
> Select Delete to delete a password and release access.

If you forget the password, enter the word "CLEAR" to access the setting mode and change or delete the
password.

5.15 Login function / process start function

This function can be used as a login function or start function in processes.

When activated, after switching on the terminal, the login prompt,

or call and quit with the following keys
> Login Call or start by pressing the Enter key for 3 seconds
> Logout or termination by pressing the C key for 3 seconds

Details for the dialogue and commands of the EDP data communication are given in the interface description
470.508.090.

Activate and adjust

In the setting mode Terminal / Login function, different variants from a simple process start query to a
password query with monitoring by an external EDP system can be user-defined.

Setting parameters Login function / Process start function

> Activation
> password request
> Create/change password
> Clear password
> Enter login text

Activation of login function (registration)

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the login function, F6 Next.
Press F6 to move on to the actuation, then press F4 to move on and press F6 to accept.
For the Startup, Login, and Password Request functions, the setting must be enabled with on.
Also for the application of external computerised monitoring.

54
After switching on the terminal or calling up the login function with the Enter key, the Login window appears

Press F6 OK to activate the logon and send a data record with the logon confirmation, then the terminal is in
weighing mode.

Press F5 Cancel to display the security question "Login Cancel?

With keys F4 to F6 NO, you return to the login window for a new login.
With the F1 to F3 key YES the logon is deactivated and a data record with the logon rejection is sent, then the
terminal is in weighing mode.

Activation of password request (external EDP request)

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the login function, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the password query, F6 to move on to the password query, then use the arrow
key F4 to select on and F6 to confirm.
To use the password request function, the Login function setting must be enabled.
Without the internal password system in the Terminal 3035, only an external computer password is
requested, sent and released.

55
After switching on the terminal or calling up the login function with the Enter key, the Login window appears

Press F5 Cancel to enter the menu Security question Login Cancel?

Press F6 OK to display the password prompt

Use the keypad to enter the required password and press the F6 key to accept it.
The password with the command code is sent to the computer for checking and enabling and the hourglass
appears on the display. Within 5 seconds the computer must release the password, if the password is not
released within this time, the security question "Cancel login? Or if an incorrect password is confirmed
(display message Error 02 incorrect password), the password prompt appears again.

If you press the F5 Cancel key in the password query, the display shows the query window Login with its
query sequence.

56
Create/change password (internal terminal password)
For the internal password request function, the Login function and password request setting must be
enabled.
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the login function, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Create/Change Password, F6 to move to Create/Change Password:

Enter the desired password with max. 35 digits and confirm with F6.
Comments:
Once an internal password has been entered, there is no longer an external computer password query.
When you create an internal terminal password, the password is always requested when you access the
Login Function area. If you forget the password, you can enter CLEAR without the password to access the
login function area.

After switching on the terminal or calling up the login function with the Enter key, the Login window appears

Press F5 Cancel to enter the menu Security question Login Cancel?

Press F6 OK to display the password prompt

57
Use the keypad to enter the required password and press the F6 key to accept it.
The entered password is checked:
If the entry is correct, the EDP data record is sent with the registration confirmation, after which the terminal
is in weighing mode.
If the password is not entered correctly, the display message Error 02 Wrong password appears briefly and
then the password prompt appears again.

If you press the F5 Cancel key in the password query, the display shows the query window Login with its
query sequence.

Delete password (internal terminal password)

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the login function, F6 Next.
Password request, internal terminal - Enter the password and press the F6 key.
If you forget the password, you can enter CLEAR without the password to enter the login function area.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Delete Password, F6 Next.
The internal password is deleted.

Enter login text

The text for the Login prompt window can be defined and set individually.
For example: "Start process" or "Start weighing sequence".
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Terminal, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the login function, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Enter login text to mark the login text, F6 Continue.
Enter the login text with max. 35 digits and confirm with F6.
Without entering the login text, the factory setting "Please login" is used.

58
5.16 SD card data backup

On the optional Micro SD card (Alibi memory) it is possible to save the setting parameters in
order to reset the data and functions at the terminal at a later date.

Content for data backup

All setting parameters (user) and the program selection of the terminal are saved.
The scale/adjustment parameters (ECAL) of the measuring points and the printed images are not saved.

Settings for data backup

In setting mode / terminal / SD card data backup, the following functions or selections are available.
> Import
> Export
> Export for automatic import

After the personal settings have been made, one of the two export functions must be executed so that the
import function can be executed later.

Import
In the SD card data backup menu, pressing F6 Continue loads the current user settings from the micro SD
card back into the terminal. The security question Import is answered with the function keys F1 to F3 YES the
data is transferred from the micro SD card to the terminal, with the function keys F4 to F6 NO no data is
transferred from the micro SD card to the terminal.

Export
In the menu SD card data backup with the selection Export, the current user settings are saved from the
terminal to the SD micro card by pressing F6 Continue.
This data backup is only for the manual import function.

Export for automatic import

In the menu SD card data backup with the selection Export for automatic import, the current user settings are
saved on the micro SD card by pressing F6 Continue.
This data backup is for the automatic or manual import function.

59
5.17 Volume measurement

The 9755.50 volume measurement system solution with the 3035 terminal records the volume and volume
weight via barcode rulers on 3 axes. The user software version is 4.33, the basic version is the standard
version 1.11.
The program includes print codes for the X dimension, Y dimension, Z dimension and the volume + volume
weight. The parameters are X = length, Y = width, Z = height of an object in cm. The volume is the calculated
value from the 3 length measurements in cdm (CubicDeziMeter). The volume weight is calculated by the
adjustable volume divisor over the current weight kg. The length measures can be entered via barcode or
keyboard.
For further detailed information, please refer to the description of the volume measuring system 9755.51
with document no. 470.051.200.

Axis dimension barcode data format

For volume capture, the barcode ruler must have the following content format in the order

1. Character Larger ">"

2. Axis abbreviation "X", "Y" or "Z
3. 3-digit axis dimension from "001" to "999" in cm

To accept the barcode in the terminal 3035, the terminating character at the end of the data string must be
CRLF. The terminating character is provided by the scanner, the scanners are configured with the terminating
character CRLF.

Operation

Position object
For volume detection, the object must be placed in the corner and fixed against the stops.

Scan object edges or via manual input at the terminal

Then move the scanner beam from the object side to the respective barcode ruler. The detection of the
barcode axis at the object edge is confirmed by the scanner by an acoustic signal.
To enter the dimensions manually, press function key F6 "Volume input", then enter the X dimension using
the keypad with 10 keys and press F6 "Accept". Then enter the Y and Z dimensions identically.

60
Volume calculation
Once the 3 axes have been accepted, the volume and volume weight are automatically calculated

Displayed after volume calculation

Volume
Divisor
Volume weight

Data output
There are various ways of triggering the transmission of data to a computer or printer.
> Automatically by scanning all three barcode axes
> Scanning the barcode Push key on the scale cover
> Pressing the push key on the terminal
The function of the data output depends on the settings of the print and data record layout!

Deleting the volume data

The volume data can be deleted by pressing the CL key or automatically with the function "Delete values after
printout", the contents of the following data fields X / Y / Z axes, volume and volume weight for volume
measurement are deleted after the volume data have been transmitted by the print code 763 Volume.
The setting parameter "Delete values after printout" is under Setting mode
/ Communication / Print image / Delete values after printout

11 Volume measurement

Measurement active Selection on or off

Actuation Volume measurement function with the function key for manual entry of
the axis values X | Y | Z and display in the information field.
Factory setting: off

Display volume weight Selection on or off

Activation of the additional display volume weight and divisor in the information
field.
Factory setting: off

Volume Divisor Input of the divisor

for calculating the volume weight, value is numeric from 1.000 to 10.000 via the
numeric keypad.
Factory setting: 5.000

61
5.18 Dynamic function keys

The dynamic function keys enable the function keys F1 - F6 to be individually designed on a separate,
programmable level. Here, process-dependent function keys can be configured and used.

The dynamic function keys have the following characteristics:

- are configured via computer commands

- can be shown or hidden
- the function key level is freely selectable
- Function key texts are 1 or 2 lines
- the function of the function key can be configured within a certain range
- the function keys are independent of the set program
- the properties of the keys are only defined via EDP commands!
- the properties of the keys can be saved on the SD card.

5.18.1 Configuration commands

The following computer commands are available for configuring the dynamic function keys:

1. 530Definition of a dynamic function key

2. 531Dynamic function keys - Line on -/off
3. 532Level of dynamic function keys - define line
4. 533Dynamic function keys - Save settings on SD card
5. 534Dynamic function keys - Load settings from SD card

5.18.2 Defining a dynamic function key

Format:<KcccKFx ;nL;tttt;Aa;dddd>

Here is: ccc3-digit command code from point 3

xthe function key number for which the configuration is (x = 1 ... 6)
n is the number of lines in the function key field (n = 1 ... 2)
tttdthe function key text. It consists of a maximum of 7 characters per line.
For 2-line text, up to 14 characters at a time.
the action number. It defines the function to be performed.
dddddthe data required for the action (max. 35 bytes).

actions:

The following actions are defined:

- A0Delete function key definition .

- A1Send data via EDP channel, i.e. the data dddd defined for the corresponding function key
is sent transparently via the EDP interface.
- A2Send data via EDP channel as EDP command, i.e. it corresponds to the above command,
with the data being sent as <dddd>.
- Interpret A3 data as a print command, i.e. the data (ASCII number) is interpreted and
processed as a print code.

62
 - Interpret A4 data as K-EDV command and execute it.
Format: CCC:DDDDCCC Command-CodeDDDD
... Data
Attention: If DDDD... is empty, the `:' must still be entered.
- Execute A6Data as EDP mode command
Format: e = EDP mode A - H (must be written in capital letters)
- A7Set switching output X and display alternative text
Format: z:tttt:iiii
z1 = 1 line, 2 = 2 lines
tttalternative text for dynamic function key, if
Switching point active
iiii [ ] = optional: pulse duration in ms
- Interpreting and executing A10 data as a Q-EDP command
Format: CCC:DDDD... CCC Command-CodeDDDD
... Data
Attention: If DDDD... is empty, the `:' must still be entered.
This command sends an acknowledgement via the EDP channel.
Examples:

Action A0:
An existing function key F1 with a 1-line designation is to be deleted.

<K530KF1;1L;;A0>

Note: If the designation has 2 lines, 1L is replaced by 2L.

Action A1:
F1 should be labeled "SEND DATA" and when pressed, send the text TARAB CONTAINER ON TOP to the
computer.

<K530KF1;2L; SEND DATA;A1;TARE CONTAINER PLACED ON THE MACHINE

Action A2:
F2 should be labeled "SEND DATA2" and when pressed, send the text <TARABOX UPLATED> to the
computer.

<K530KF2;2L; SEND DATA2;A2;TARE CONTAINER PLACED ON THE MACHINE

Action A3:
F3 should be labeled "PRINT" and when pressed, press print key 2 and send the corresponding data set /
print image.

<K530KF3;1L;DRUCKEN;A3;22>

Note: For the relevant printing conditions, refer to 5.18.7 Printing Conditions. The assignment of a print
image or data record (using Soehnle service program) to print key 2 is a prerequisite for output to a printer or
computer.

63
Action A4:
F4 should be labeled "PRINT" and when pressed, trigger the print key of the 3035 terminal and send the
corresponding data record / print image.

<K530KF4;1L;DRUCK;A4;220:>

Note: The corresponding control commands can be found in the interface description
for the 3035 terminal with document number 470.508.090.

Action A6:
F5 should be labeled "SEND CURRENT" and when pressed, execute the command <F> send continuously and
send the corresponding data record.

<K530KF5;2L; TRANSMISSION RUNNING;A6;F>

Action A7:
F6 should be marked "START" and set the corresponding switching output when pressed. Alternatively,
"STOP" should be displayed in the function key as alternative text. The duration of the switching process is
specified as 1,000ms. If no switching duration is specified, the output remains active until it is switched off
manually via the corresponding function key.

<K530KF6;1L; START;A7;1: STOP:1000>

Action A10:
F1 is to have the designation "BARCODE" and when pressed, execute the corresponding Q command "076 -
Display barcode memory in info field". The duration of the display process is indicated after the colon.

<K530KF1;1L;BARCODE;A10;076:5>

5.18.3 Switching dynamic function keys on/off

Switch dynamic function keys on/off via the 3035 terminal:

Setting mode / Terminal / Dyn. function keys / on / off / off or on

Switch dynamic function keys on/off via external terminal software:

Format: <KcccKFfff>

where: ccc3-digit command code

fff "on" or "off

Examples:

Switch on the display of the dynamic function keys: <K531KFon>

Switch off the display of the dynamic function keys: <K531KFoff>

64
5.18.4 Defining the level of the dynamic function keys

Set the X plane of the dynamic function keys.

Format: <KcccKLx>

Where: ccc3-digit command code 532

xthe level (1 - 4)

Example:

The dynamic function keys should be on level 2: <K532KL2>

5.18.5 Saving the settings of the dynamic function keys

Save dynamic function keys to the SD card via the 3035 terminal:

Setting mode / Terminal / Dyn. function keys / Write file

Save dynamic function keys to the SD card using external terminal software:

Allows you to save the configurations on the SD card under the transferred name.

Note! If the settings are to be loaded automatically on start-up, they must be saved in a file:

Example: "FKD1.TXT

If no dynamic function keys are to be displayed during start-up, switch them off first and save them in the file
"FKD1.TXT", for example

Format: <KcccKfff>

where: ccc3-digit command code

fffFILENAME .TXT where the convention is a maximum of 8 characters.TXT (all capitalised)
:

Example:

<K533KTEST.TXT>

5.18.6 Loading the settings of the dynamic function keys

Load dynamic function keys from the SD card via the 3035 terminal:

Setting mode / Terminal / Dyn. function keys / Read file

65
Load dynamic function keys from the SD card via external terminal software:

This allows the configurations to be loaded from the SD card from the file with the transferred name.

Format: <KcccKfff>

where: ccc3-digit command code 533

fffFILENAME .TXT (see above)

Example:
<K533KTEST.TXT>

5.18.7 Printing conditions

For Action A3, the printing conditions that can be used to program a dynamic function key are listed below:

1=Print key 1
2=<A> Auto imprint/data record once immediately
3=<B> Auto printout/data record once after weight change at stability
4=<C> Auto printout/data record after weight change at stability
5=<D> Auto printout/data record after weight change at stability above empty
6=<E> Auto printout/data record after weight change at stability above empty signal after enabling small
empty signal
7=<F> Send running
8=Enter key when entering Org A
9=Enter key when entering Org B
10=Enter key when entering Org C
11=Enter key when entering Org D
12=Plus key
13=Enter/call over key for manual input
14=Enter/cancellation key
15=Sum key (depending on settings)
16=Container key (container seal)
17=Enter/transfer key during initial weighing
18=Enter/transfer key for second weighing
19=enter/transfer key for single weighing
20=<H> Auto printout/data record once without weight change at stability
21=Scanning
22=Print key 2
23=Send continuously EDV unidirectional
24=Print item list
25=Enter key
26=Start mode (Dyn. switching)
27=measuring point changeover
32=<I> EDP data record automatically after standstill
36=any print-triggering function for dynamic F-key or EDP commands
37=any print-triggering function for dynamic F-key or EDP commands
38=any print-triggering function for dynamic F-key or EDP commands
39=any print-triggering function for dynamic F-key or EDP commands
40=any print-triggering function for dynamic F-key or EDP commands
41=any print-triggering function for dynamic F-key or EDP commands
42=CL key
45=Multiscan ready

66
6 APPLICATION PROGRAMS

The various application programs of the Soehnle terminal 3035 offer you comprehensive solutions for your
weighing tasks.
You can customize the application programs in the setting mode to meet your specific needs. For details,
refer to the respective chapter Settings in Setting Mode.

The following application programs are available:

> Weighing and taring

> Totalizing and picking
> Counting
> Check
> Classification
> Recipe
> Neutral measurement
> Vehicle scale
> Dynamic switching
> Percentage weighing

6.1 Selection of the application programs

Switch on the terminal.

After the switch-on routine, the terminal automatically starts the last activated application program.
To select another application program, switch to the setting functions level.

6.2 Function keys

Level Setting functions

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F5 Program key. You are now in the selection menu Programs.

67
Use the arrow keys F3 up and F4 down to mark the user program, then press F6 to accept it.

6.3 Navigation in the application programs

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions.

These take on different functions depending on the program and situation.
The respective function is shown on the display in the function bar.
The function keys are assigned in up to 4 levels, depending on the program, and the function change key is
used to scroll through the levels.

Meaning of the function keys

↑ Move the marker up in the list

↓ Move the marker down in the list
End Exiting the setting mode
Next Call up the marked menu item
Back Return to higher level
Cancel without accepting a change
Delete Deleting a position with return
Save an entry or change
→ Cursor to the right
← Cursor to the left

6.4 Custom programs

In addition to the 10 standard user programs, it is possible to program sequences according to your special
requirements in the factory.
The following special programs are available: compound wheel load scales, price labelling and others.
Please contact us.

Phone: +49 7191 34 53-220

fax: +49 7191 34 53-211
mail: [email protected]

68
6.5 Weighing and taring

Basic function weighing, determination of gross and net weights

Info: The following description of the tare functions applies to the factory setting of the options
> Autotara in position off
> Tare summing to position off, i.e. new tare overwrites old tare
Selecting options in the scale setting mode menu

6.5.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in 2 levels, the change
between the levels is made by the function change key.

1st level tare functions:

Tare Add Int. Multi Save

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2nd level setting functions:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

6.5.2 Display view

Basic view weighing

69
Tip: To display the tare weight or a second unit, for example, you can press the F3 key to open an additional
secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary display is made in setting mode
under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Figure: Secondary display with tare weight

6.5.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / weighing + tare / display information field, you can set which data is
displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Switch between the individual functions used, e.g. switching functions for inputs and
outputs and organization data memory.
> IO control: Continuous display of output and input states
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Fixed tare values: Continuous display of the activated fixed tare value memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement function.

Display Information field with setting Fixed tare values

70
6.5.4 Weighing without taring

Place the weighing piece on the scale, the weight is displayed with the note Gross.

6.5.5 Manual taring

Determination and taring of an unknown container weight.

Place the empty container on the scale. Press the key .

The tare value is saved, the weight display goes to zero and the weight is displayed with the message Net.
When the scale is unloaded, the tare weight is displayed with a negative sign.
Pressing the key again overwrites the existing value, i.e. a new tare weight placed on the scale is
stored.
It can be tared unlimited times until the maximum load is reached. The tared weight reduces the maximum
weighing range accordingly.
Delete the tare by overwriting it with a new tare or by pressing the or key .

To display the tare memory, press the key , then the key . Here, you can delete the tare memory
with F2 Clear, F5 Cancel terminates the display of the tare memory without making any changes. If you want
to change the value in the tare memory, you can enter a new value with the numeric keypad and enter it in the
tare memory with F6 as a manual tare entry.

6.5.6 Taring with manual tare

Setting the tare for a known container weight, e.g. with filled container on the scale.

Enter the known tare weight using the numeric keypad and accept the value by pressing the F6 Accept key or
the key .

The entry is stored in the tare memory and the tare weight is subtracted from the weight display; the weight
is displayed with the message Net. When the scale is unloaded, the tare weight is displayed with a negative
sign.
Delete the tare by overwriting it with a new tare or by pressing the or key .

To display the tare memory, press the key , then the key .
Here you can delete the tare memory with F2 Delete, F5 Cancel ends the display of the tare memory without
making any changes. If you want to change the value in the tare memory, you can enter a new value with the
numeric keypad and enter it in the tare memory with F6 as a manual tare entry.

71
6.5.7 Multiplicative tare

Determining the tare of several containers of equal weight with known tare weight.

Press the F4 Multi Tare key in the Tare functions level.

Place a container on the scale or enter the known tare weight via the numeric keypad.
Confirm with F6 Accept.
Enter the number of containers with the numeric keypad.
Confirm with F6 Accept.

The entry is stored in the tare memory and the total tare weight is subtracted from the weight display. The
weight is displayed with the message Net. When the scale is unloaded, the tare weight is displayed with a
negative sign.

Delete the tare by overwriting it with a new tare or by pressing the or key .

To display the tare memory, press the key , then the key .
Here you can delete the tare memory with F2 Delete, F5 Cancel ends the display of the tare memory without
making any changes. If you want to change the value in the tare memory, you can enter a new value with the
numeric keypad and enter it in the tare memory with F6 as a manual tare entry.

6.5.8 Additive tare

Determining the tare of several - even different - containers with known tare weight.

Press the F2 Add Tare key in the Tare functions level.

Enter the known tare weight of the first container via the numeric keypad.
Confirm with F6 Accept. Repeat the procedure for the remaining containers.
The tare values are stored in the tare memory and the total tare weight is subtracted from the weight display;
the weight is displayed with the message Net. When the scale is unloaded, the tare weight is displayed with a
negative sign.

Delete the tare by overwriting it with a new tare or by pressing the or key .

To display the tare memory, press the key , then the key .
Here you can delete the tare memory with F2 Clear, F5 Cancel ends the display of the tare memory without
making any changes. If you want to change the value in the tare memory, you can enter a new value with the
numeric keypad and enter it in the tare memory with F6 as a manual tare entry.

72
6.5.9 Intermediate tare

Unknown tare values are added to the existing tare memory, the net value remains unchanged.

Press the F3 Zw Tara key in Tare functions level. Put on the additional tare weight. Confirm with F6 Accept.
The additional tare weight was stored in the tare memory, the net value remains unchanged.
Repeat the procedure for further additional tare.
The weight is displayed with the note Net. When the scale is unloaded, the tare weight is displayed with a
negative sign.

Delete the tare by overwriting it with a new tare or by pressing the or key .

To display the tare memory, press the key , then the key .
Here you can delete the tare memory with F2 Delete, F5 Cancel ends the display of the tare memory without
making any changes. If you want to change the value in the tare memory, you can enter a new value with the
numeric keypad and enter it in the tare memory with F6 as a manual tare entry.

6.5.10 Automatic tare

Automatically tares the first weight value on the scale.

Activate the Autotare function for the desired measuring point in the setting mode under Scale
/ Scale parameters / Autotare with the setting on.
Place an empty container on the empty scale.
At stability, the first weight value is stored in the tare memory and subtracted from the weight display. The
weight is displayed with the message Net.
During automatic taring, the message "Autotare active" is displayed. When the scale is unloaded, the tare
memory is automatically cleared and the message "Autotare active" is displayed. The scale returns to the
gross display.

You can clear Auto-Tare with a loaded scale by pressing the or key.
The Auto-Tare function is activated automatically when the scale is unloaded and again loaded.

To display the tare memory, press the key , then the key.
Here you can delete the tare memory with F2 Clear, F5 Cancel ends the display of the tare memory without
making any changes. If you want to change the value in the tare memory, you can enter a new value with the
numeric keypad and enter it in the tare memory with F6 as a manual tare entry.

Combinations of auto tare with other tare functions:

> Multiplicative tare
The large container placed on the scale first is tared by auto-tare. Identical sub-packages placed on
the scale are then tared by multi-tare.
> Additive tareThe
first large container placed on the scale is tared by auto tare. Different sub-packages with known tare
are then placed on the scale and tared by manual add-tare.
> Intermediate tare
The large container placed on the scale first is tared by auto-tare. Different sub-packages with
unknown tare are then placed on the scale and are tared by intermediate tare.

73
6.5.11 Fixed tare value memory

The use of the fixed tare memory is only possible with an optional Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card.
Known tare weights can be stored in a power-failure-proof memory and called up as required. You can store
999 reference weights in a fail-safe memory.
Each memory location has:
> three-digit serial number
> Name (alphanumeric max. 18 digits)
> tare value

a) Call up the list of fixed tare values to edit the fixed values:
Press key and then F1 Tara Fix.

Selection of existing fixed values from the list

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached, accept the desired fixed
value with F6 Edit.
Direct access via article number or memory location number. Enter the article number or memory location
number with the numeric keypad. Whether to call the item number or memory location number is specified in
the setting mode. Enter the article number as a search criterion left-justified and the memory location
number as a search criterion right-justified. Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

Edit an existing fixed value from the list

Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter Designation is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input with numeric/alpha keyboard.
Input with F6 Accept, abort without accepting the input with F5 Abort.
Parameter Tare value is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha keyboard.
Input with F6 Accept, cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete. Press the F1, F2 or F3 key to confirm deletion with YES. Press
the F4, F5 or F6 keys with NO to cancel the operation.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Create and save a new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is automatically assigned by the terminal.
The first number in brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number indicates
the
memory locations occupied by
fixed tare values.
Parameter Name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input with numeric/alpha keyboard.
Enter with F6 Accept, cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.

Parameter Tare value is highlighted, call up via F6 Edit, input via numeric/alpha keyboard.
Input with F6 Accept, cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

74
b) Call up the list of fixed tare values for taring:
In the Tare functions level, press the F1 Tare Fix key. The display shows the last fixed tare value called up.

Selection within the list

Scroll with the arrow keys.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Accept.
Direct access via memory location number.
Enter the memory location number with the numeric keypad.
Direct access via barcode or EDP
(information in chapter 7.10 Barcode management or ask your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner)

Note
If the fixed memory recall via barcode function is activated and a fixed value not contained in the fixed
memory is recalled, the error message "Error 83 - Fixed value not available" is displayed. You are returned to
the weighing mode and the selected function is deleted.

Clear fixed tare value

To delete the tare value and the designation from the working memory, press the CL key.

6.5.12 Error messages when taring

Error 06: Taring not possible.

Possible causes:
> Empty scale,
> Scale in overload or underload,
> Tare hand input with tare value over maximum load,
> Scale shows a negative weight value.

6.5.13 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare FixDisplay of

the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

75
6.5.14 Accepting current values into the fixed memory

For direct transfer of fixed tare values into the fixed memory, first transfer the tare value or enter tare hand.

Gross

Press the F5 key to confirm. Fix, the value can be stored directly in the fixed memory.
The input window for the fixed tare values appears.

To enter the designation of the fixed tare value, press the F6 key Edit.
Enter the designation with the keypad and confirm the entry by pressing the F6 key.

6.5.15 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

76
6.5.16 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in the setting mode you can adapt the weighing and taring application program to your
individual requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press key F6 Setting mode in the Setting functions level and call up the program
settings with F6 Accept.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

1 Weighing and taring

Fixed tare values Editing fixed tare values

Selection of existing fixed values from the list
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
The parameter name is highlighted, call it up with F6 Edit,
Input via keyboard. Confirm the input with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way.
Delete an existing fixed value
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.
Save new fixed value
Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the machine. The first number in
brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number
indicates the memory locations occupied by fixed values.
The parameter name is marked, call it up with F6 Edit,
Input via keyboard.
Accept the input with F6 Accept.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

Fixed tare values Select Do not execute or Execute

delete Execute deletes all fixed tare values

ORG A Delete fixed values Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all ORG A fixed values

ORG B Delete fixed values Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all ORG B fixed values

ORG C Delete fixed values Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all ORG C fixed values

ORG D Delete fixed values Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all ORG D fixed values

77
 1 Weighing and taring

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Switch between the individual functions used, e.g. switching
functions inputs and outputs and organization data memory.
> IO control: Continuous display of output and input states
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Fixed tare values: Continuous display of the activated fixed tare value
memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: Display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value.
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Factory setting

6.6 Totalizing and picking

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other, the weight is added in the total memory and
the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale. The weight is added in the total memory and the
scale returns to zero without unloading.
Changing measuring points during the picking process is not permitted.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings. The selection applies to all connected weighbridges. The
following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.
Total memory capacity
A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory. Afterwards, the totalizing memory must
be cleared.

6.6.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in 3 levels, the change
through the levels is made by the function change key.

1. Totaling functions level:

Total Cancel Manual Add

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

78
2. Tare functions level:

Tare Add Int. Multi Save

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3. Setup functions level:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram Mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

6.6.2 Display view

After the first totalizing operation, the display changes from the basic view to the totalizing view, provided
that the setting Display information field is set to factory setting.

Gross

Tip: For an additional display, e.g. the 10-fold higher resolution x10 or the tare weight, you can press the F3
key to open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary display
is made in setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

79
Illustration of display secondary display with x10 display

Gross

6.6.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / buzzer + Comm. / Display information field, you can set which data
is displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. totalizing memory, organization
data memory and switching functions for inputs and outputs.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> IO control: Continuous display of output and input states
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Fixed tare values: Continuous display of the activated fixed tare value memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement function.

Example Setting Information field display on Last item:

Gross

80
6.6.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

6.6.5 Operating the totalizing function

Use the function change key to call up the totalizing functions level

Plus F6
By pressing the F6 Plus key, the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are increased by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in the setting
mode.
A weight value with 0 or summation without unload is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight" (with unload
factor = 0 only a weight change is necessary).
Gross, tare and net weights are added together.

Hand F5
You can enter weight values and quantities manually with the F5 manual key.
You can enter them with the numeric keypad and confirm your entry with the F6 Accept key.
In the input window, you can switch between the adjusted unit, the second unit and the quantity with the
function change key . Manual entries are identified in the printout by the designation "manual".
The item counter and the sequence number are incremented by 1. Weight values are added to the weight
total, piece numbers are added separately to the piece total.

cancellation F4
Individual items can be cancelled or weighed back with the F4 Cancel key.
After pressing the cancel key, you are prompted either to load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the
consecutive number of the weight to be cancelled.
You can obtain information on the consecutive number in advance by using the key combination and F5
Plus.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled and confirm with F6
Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, the weight value is taken from the scale when key F6 is pressed. If the
scale is not loaded, error message Error 46 is displayed.
Cancellation or backweighing is indicated in the print document by the designation cancellation.
The consecutive number is incremented by one and the item counter is decremented by one.
If the item counter is at 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by error message Error 48.

Total F3 or with the CL key

Press the F3 Total key to complete the totalizing operation.
The display now shows the gross, tare, net and piece totals, as well as the item counter and consecutive
number of the last operation.

81
6.6.6 Options for displaying totals

Clearing the totalizing memory

The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:
> Display, print and delete totalsAfter
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.
> Display of totals only
After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Delete total to delete the total memory, followed by the confirmation prompt Delete
total? Pressing the keys F1 to F3 YES to delete the totalizing memory, while pressing the keys F34 to
F6 NO does not delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the key F6 Back.

6.6.7 Relief factor for summation

(Parameter is not used in the picking function)

In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
time you place each item on the scale in the totalizing function. If the scale is not unloaded, the weight value
is not saved in the totalizing memory and is displayed with the error message Error 55 Place weight on scale.
This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

6.6.8 Auto-summing / -picking

In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.

Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
taken over into the totalizing memory after unloading (only for totalizing) and placing on weight and after
standstill.
If the autototalizing function is interrupted by a cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
autototalizing must be restarted with the Plus key.
Info: Like manual totalizing, auto totalizing can be defined as a condition that triggers printing (see chapter
on printing).
During auto-picking, a load < 5 digits is not automatically stored, but weights < 5 digits can be manually
stored in the picking memory by pressing the F6 Plus key.

6.6.9 Preferred totalizing scale

The totalizing memory can only be determined with one unit and resolution. When using several scales
(measuring points) with different settings, the parameters of the currently connected scale are used for the
totalizing process.
In setting mode, the function Preferred totalizing scale can be assigned.
The selected scale no. always determines the unit and resolution for the totalizing memory.

82
6.6.10 Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, hand, cancellation) in the totalizing memory is assigned a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> Clearing the totalizing memory
> Switching off the terminal
> function key: in the 1st level of totalizing functions, the F1 key (delete current number) is switched on
with the function.

6.6.11 Item counter

The item counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new operation with
plus, manual or automatic totalizing, the item counter is incremented by 1.
The item counter runs up to 999, after which the error message Error 45 appears.
The item counter is automatically set to zero each time the total is cleared.

6.6.12 Keys that trigger printing

Additional keys or functions such as Plus, Manual, Cancel and Total can be used as print-triggering keys for
the Totalizing / Picking function, e.g. for printing a document. A prerequisite is that a print image has been
stored for the respective key.
In setting mode, the totalizing key function must be set to "Display, print
and delete" or delete the total with the F2 key.

6.6.13 Display of current totals

Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by pressing
and then press the key F4 Sum.
You can delete the totals with the F2 key and the consecutive number (if only "Display" is activated in setting
mode under the function "Total key") or return to the totalizing mode with the F6 Back key.

Display Current totals view:

83
Info: Display information field with current totals
In the setting mode / program settings / buzzer + Comm. / Display information field, the total can be set,
then the total is always displayed in the information field.

6.6.14 Displaying individual items

Within a summation, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by
Press the and the F5 Plus key in succession. The item list starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Info: Display information field with item list

In the setting mode / program settings / buzzer + Comm. / Display information field, the last item can be set,
in which case the last item is always displayed in the information field.

84
6.6.15 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare FixDisplay of
the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F4 Total
Display of the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 PlusDisplays
all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called up with the
arrow keys (F3/F4).
> tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.6.16 Accepting current values into the fixed memory

For direct transfer of fixed tare values into the fixed memory, first transfer the tare value or enter tare hand.

Gross

85
Press the F5 key to confirm. Fix, the value can be stored directly in the fixed memory.
The input window for the fixed tare values appears.

To enter the designation of the fixed tare value, press the F6 key Edit.
Enter the designation with the keypad and confirm the entry by pressing the F6 key.

6.6.17 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.6.18 Settings in setting mode

With the parameters in Setting mode, you can adapt the Totalizing and Picking application program to your
individual requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

2 Totalizing and picking

Buzz or come. Select Totalizing or Picking for the following settings.

Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale. Factory
setting: Totalisation

Preferred totalizing scale Selection none, scale xx, scale xx etc.

Which scale no. is used for the resolution of the totalizing memory.
If none, the currently connected scale is always used for the first totalisation.
Factory setting: none

86
2 Totalizing and picking

Auto totalisation/commiss. Selection from or on

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to
weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to
allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. totalizing
memory, organization data memory, switching functions.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> IO control: Continuous display of output and input states
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Fixed tare values: Continuous display of the activated fixed tare value
memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: Display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value.
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute selection resets all settings to factory defaults

87
6.7 Counting

Counting of parts of equal weight.

The weight of the individual parts (reference weight) is determined from a known small quantity of counted
parts. This is then used as a divisor to determine the number of pieces from the weight of an unknown
quantity of these counting parts.

6.7.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in 4 levels, the change
through the levels is made by the function change key .

1. level counting functions:

Ref Ref Ref

Total Cancel Add
10 Variab Weight

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2nd level control functions:

Ref Ref Units

Stat Fix contr.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3rd level tare functions:

Tare Add Int. Multi Save

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

4th level setting functions:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

88
6.7.2 Display view Counting

Reference weight

Gross

Gross

pcs

Tip: For an additional display, e.g. of the reference quantity, the x10 resolution or the tare weight, you can
press the F3 key to open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the
additional display is made in the setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Additional display.

Illustration of the auxiliary display with reference quantity

Reference weight

Gross

Gross

pcs

89
6.7.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / counting / display information field, you can set which data are
displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Counting: Toggling between the individual functions used, counting with the reference weight and
weight value in gross / net e.g. checkweighing, totalizing memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Fixed values reference weight: Continuous display of the activated reference weight memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight value or counter value
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement function.

Example Setting Display information field to fixed values reference weight:

Example control display, a traffic light display is available in the information field.

1. Below tolerance 2. within tolerance 3. Above tolerance

(setpoints reached exactly)

6.7.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

90
6.7.5 Counting function

The determination of the reference weight is possible via the following function keys:

> Function key F1 Ref 10Reference weight determination

from a pre-set reference sample quantity. Place 10 counting pieces on the scale, then press the F1
Ref 10 key The scale determines the reference weight and displays "10 pieces". Further parts placed
on the scale are counted continuously. The standard reference piece count "10" can be set in Setting
mode / Program settings / Counting under Standard Ref piece count. (chapter 6.7.14).
For example, if 25 is stored there, the function key is now called F1 Ref 25 and 25 pieces must be
loaded to determine the reference weight.

> Function key F2 Ref VariabReference weight determination

from a freely selectable reference sample quantity. Place a certain number of reference parts on the
scale. Press the F2 Ref Variab key and use the numeric keypad to enter the number of parts (1 to
9999) on the scale. Press the F6 Accept key. The terminal determines the reference weight and
displays the number of parts on the scale. Any further parts placed on the machine are counted
consecutively.

> Function key F3 Ref Weight input

of a known reference weight. Press the F3 Ref Gew key and enter the known reference weight in with
the numeric keypad. An existing reference weight is displayed and can be overwritten. By default, the
reference weight is entered in the unit "grams". If you want to enter the reference weight in
"kilograms", you can change the unit with the key . Confirm your entry with F6 Accept.
The terminal has stored the reference weight and displays the number of pieces on the machine.

New reference weight

Existing reference weights are generally overwritten by a new reference weight determination or by taking
over a fixed value from the fixed memory.

Display reference weight

Press the F3 Ref Gew key or activate the secondary display (see chapter 6.7.2)

End counting
The counting process is terminated by deleting the reference weight. The reference weight can be deleted by
pressing F3 Ref Gew and F2 Delete or simply by pressing the key . The display shows the current weight
value.

Read-only memory Reference weight (Ref Fix)

You can store 999 counting items in a power-failure-proof database.
Each memory location has the following entries:
> Three-digit serial number
> Description (alphanumeric max. 18 characters)
> Article number (alphanumeric max. 18 digits)
> Reference weight
> Target quantity
> Tolerance minus
> Tolerance plus
> Tare value

91
a) Calling up the Ref Fix memory to process the counting articles:
Press key and then F2 Ref Fix

Selection of existing fixed values from the list

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached, accept the desired fixed
value with F6 Edit.
Direct access via article number or memory location number. Enter the article number or memory location
number with the numeric keypad. Whether to call the item number or memory location number is specified in
the setting mode. Enter the article number as a search criterion left-justified and the memory location
number as a search criterion right-justified. Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

Edit an existing fixed value from the list

Edit the selected fixed value with F6 Edit.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Accept the input with F6 (Cancel
without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are edited in the same way.

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4 or call via the article number or the consecutive number.
Delete the called fixed value with F2 Delete. Answer the security question with YES.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Save new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the machine. The first number in brackets indicates the number
of free memory locations, the second number indicates the occupied memory locations.
Parameter Name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input with the keyboard. Accept the input with F6 (cancel
without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

b) Call up the list of reference weights for counting:

In level 2 Control functions, press the F4 Ref Fix key.
The display shows the last fixed value called up

Selection within the list

> Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached,
accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept
> Direct access via article number or memory location number

Enter the article or memory location number with the numeric keypad.
(Determine whether the article number or memory location number is called up in setting mode, enter
the article number as search criterion left-justified, enter the memory location number as search
criterion right-justified) Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept

92
When the fixed value is called up, target piece counts, tolerances for piece control and tare value are also
taken over, if saved.
Delete all stored reference weights using the "Delete reference weights" function in setting mode

Note
If the fixed memory recall via barcode function is activated and a fixed value not contained in the fixed
memory is recalled, the error message "Error 83 - Fixed value not available" is displayed. You are returned to
the weighing mode and the selected function is deleted.

6.7.6 Totalizing and picking

This function is also available in count mode.

With this function, items of the same piece goods can be totaled / picked.
The totalizing functions are controlled with function keys on the counting functions level.

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other, the weight in the total memory is added and
the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale.
The weight is added in the total memory and the scale returns to zero without unloading.
It is not allowed to change measuring points during the picking process.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings.
The selection applies to all connected weighbridges.
The following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory.
The totalizing memory must then be cleared.

93
Display view
After the first totalisation, the display changes from the basic Count view to the Totalizing view if the setting
"Display information field" is set to Count.

Operation of the totalizing functions

Call the totalizing functions level with the function change key .

> Plus F6
By pressing the Plus key the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are incremented by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in the
setting mode.
A weight value with 0 or totalisation without unload is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight". With
unload factor = 0 only one weight change is necessary.
Gross, tare and net values and quantities are totalised.

> Cancel F5 With

the cancel key, individual items can be cancelled or weighed back. After pressing the cancel key, you
are prompted to either load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the consecutive number of the
weight to be cancelled.
For information on the consecutive number, use the key combination Info and plus F5.
enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled using the numeric keypad and confirm with
F6 Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, pressing F6 will cause the weight value to be taken from the
scale. If the scale is not loaded, an error message Error 46 is displayed. Cancellation or backweighing
is indicated in the print document by the designation Cancellation.
The consecutive number is incremented by one and the item counter is decremented by one.
If the item counter is at 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by error message
Error 48.

> Total F4 or with the CL keyThe

Total key completes the totalizing process.
The display now shows the gross, tare, net and piece totals, as well as the transaction counter and
consecutive number of the last operation.

94
Selection options for displaying the total
Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totalsAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.

> Display totals onlyAfter

pressing the Total function key, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 Clear total key to delete the total memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the F6 Back key.

Relief factor for summation

(Cannot be activated during picking)
In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
placement of each item on the scale
. This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

Auto-Summing
In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.
Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
loaded according to weight and stability are stored in the totalizing memory.
As long as Auto-Summing is active, the plus key is dimmed.
If the auto-summing is interrupted by cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
then Auto-Summing must be started again with the Plus key.
Info: Auto-summing can be defined as a print triggering condition just like manual summing
(see chapter 8 Printing).

Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, hand, cancellation) in the totalizing memory increases a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> with key Delete total
> when switching off
> Function key "delete current number

95
Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new
operation with plus, manual or automatic totalizing, the item counter is incremented by 1. The transaction
counter runs up to 999, after which an error message is displayed. If the transaction is cancelled, the
transaction counter is reduced by 1.
The transaction counter is automatically set to zero when the total is cleared.

Print triggering keys

The Plus, Cancellation and Total keys can trigger a document printout.
A prerequisite is that a print image has been saved for the relevant key.
For the totalizing key, the option "Display, print
and delete" must be selected.

Display current totals

You can display the totalised values within a totaliser, by successivel pressing the and then the F4 Total
key. You can delete the totals with key F2 Total and delete the key F1 for the current number F1 (if activated
in setting mode) or return to the totalizing function with key F6.

96
Display individual items
Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing
the - and the plus key F5 in
succession. The item list starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Totalizing outside tolerance

The accumulation of quantities that are outside a specified tolerance range can be prevented. If the quantity
is outside the tolerance, the error message "Out of tolerance" is displayed after pressing the Plus key.
To do this, you must switch off in setting mode under "Totalizing out of tolerance". You define the target
quantity and the permitted tolerance in the piece control mode.
Further information under piece control

Summation of different counting parts

The totalizing of different counting parts can be prevented by enabling the determination of a new reference
weight only after clearing the totalizing memory by pressing "Clear total" in the setting mode.

6.7.7 Reference Statistics

Determination of the weight tolerance of counting parts.

The weighbridge with the finest resolution is used.
The unit weight must be greater than the smallest digit of the connected weighbridge.

Unload the scale. Press the key F3 Ref Stat.

The scale goes to weight display zero and asks "1. place sample on the scale".
Place the sample on the scale, the scale takes over, goes to weight value zero and requests the second
sample.
The previous sample remains on the scale.
Repeat the procedure until the desired number of samples is reached.
Key F6 Accept leads to the evaluation and display of the statistics.

97
Example of reference statistics display: Samples 04
Lightest part 24,448 g
Heaviest part 24,750 g
Deviation 0,302 g
Mean value 24,589 g
Printout of the statistics
Press the function key F1 "Print". Print output is only possible by using the interface on printer 1 "2795.14". If
necessary, the print image with the required print output must be adapted via the service program.

Storage of the mean value as reference weight for counting

Press F6 Accept.

Exiting the reference statistics without adopting the mean value

Press F5 Cancel.

6.7.8 Piece control

With the "piece check" function, piece goods can be dosed into a container or quantities checked.
Example: You want to fill 1000 counted parts with max. 3 parts tolerance into one container.
Example: You want to check several batches for compliance with the quantity.

To call up the piece control function, you must already be in count mode, i.e. you must have defined a
reference weight.
In level 2 Control functions, press the F5 key Contr.
Enter the desired number of pieces with the numeric keypad and confirm with
F6 Accept. Use the numeric keypad to enter the accepted tolerance in pieces and confirm with the F6 key.

If you want to define plus and minus tolerance separately, activate in the setting mode under program
settings / counting / +/- tolerance separately / on.
The display switches to the Count display view and the traffic light function with the special characters is
activated. The corresponding traffic light colour with special characters is displayed according to the actual
status on the scale for the setpoint.

Control status Traffic light colour Special characters

Below tolerance limit Yellow
Within tolerance Green
Setpoint reached exactly Green

Above tolerance limit Red

You can also have the difference to the target weight displayed in the top left-hand side of the secondary
display in figures with a + or - sign. Activate the secondary display with the F3 key Secondary display in level
4 Setting functions.

Display setpoint and tolerance

Press the Info key and then the F3 key.

98
Switching points for piece control
If you want to transmit the control values via the interface, e.g. to a control traffic light or a controller, an I/O
card must be installed in the terminal. This must be activated in the setting mode under Program settings /
Counting / IO Pre-assignment must be activated with Execute. The output signals are assigned as follows:

Switching point Signal

S1Weight weight over tolerance
S2not active
S3Weight weight within tolerance
S4Weight weight under tolerance
S5empty message
S6Weight weight over tolerance
The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside a defined tolerance range can be prevented or accepted. If a data record
is released outside the tolerance range, it is marked with a special character. Enabling or disabling in setting
mode under Program settings / Counting / Data record out of tolerance.

Launch mode
If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after reaching the respective
activated switching points. The scale can then be unloaded without deactivating the switching point and thus
starting a new process unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F6 Start key in the
level Control functions.
Activate the start mode in the setting mode under Program settings / Counting / Start mode.

End piece control

Press the key to call up the 2nd level of control functions and press key F5 Quantities Contr., then delete
with key F2 Delete or complete deletion with key .

6.7.9 Counting with several weighbridges

If several scales are connected, the reference weight can be determined on each scale and quantities can be
counted. For best results it is recommended to determine the reference weight on the scale with the finest
numerical increment. Select the scale with the scale key.
After determining the reference weight, it is possible to switch to a higher capacity bulk scale in order to be
able to count large quantities with the reference weight determined on the reference scale.

Automatic switchover:
You can specify a preferred reference scale in the setting mode.
The changeover from the quantity scale to the reference scale and back is then automatic.
Place the reference quantity on the reference scale and press the Ref 10 key or Ref Variable key. The display
switches to the preferred reference scale, the reference weight is determined, and then the bulk scale is
switched on to determine the quantity.
If, in deviation from this, not only the reference weight determination but also the counting on the reference
scale is to be carried out, then switch manually from the bulk scale to the reference scale before determining
the reference weight.

99
6.7.10 Counting accuracy

In the setting mode you can influence the counting accuracy of your scale in the program settings / counting.

> Standard reference quantity

The reference quantity 10 is set at the factory.
You can set this number between 1 and 99.
For small parts, it is advisable to use a larger number of parts to determine the reference weight.

> Minimum reference weight

The counting scale checks whether the total weight of the reference parts falls below a minimum
reference weight. Basis for the calculation is the smallest digit of the scale multiplied by a value
stored in the setting mode. Factory setting is the factor 10, i.e. 10 digit steps. Values between 1 and
50 are possible.

If the minimum reference weight is not reached or if the calculated reference weight is smaller than
the scale interval (the smallest scale interval for multiple range scales), the calculated quantity is
marked with an asterisk in the display for the user's information.

If a reference part falls below 10% of the smallest digit of the connected scale, then it is not possible
to determine a reference weight for these parts,
"Error 04 Reference weight too small" appears in the
display. These parts should be
counted
with a scale with a smaller numerical increment.

Example for a scale with 1 g increments:

factory setting is 10 d = 10 g for the total weight of the reference parts.
If you reduce the factory setting to 5 d, the scale will accept 5 g as the minimum weight for the total
weight of the reference parts. If you increase the factory setting to 20 d, the scale will accept 20 g as
the minimum weight for the total weight of the reference parts.

> Optimisation Ref. (reference weight optimisation)

The reference weight of a batch, determined by the reference weight calculation from, for example, 10
or 20 parts, is usually not the "real average weight" of a part from the entire batch. In a batch there is
always the lightest and the heaviest part somewhere. The difference between the two parts is the
manufacturing tolerance, which influences the counting accuracy.

The reference weight determination at the beginning of a counting process of e.g. 10 or 20 parts, is
made from a "randomly" taken number of parts, which naturally differs from the "real average weight"
(reference weight). Therefore, it would be desirable for the accuracy of the counting results if the
reference weight could be determined not only once at the beginning of the counting process, but
several times during the counting process, from an ever increasing number of parts.

The solution to this problem is reference weight optimisation.

After the reference weight has been determined on the basis of a reference quantity, e.g. 10 or 20
parts, the reference quantity (initial quantity) is first shown in the display. Now further parts are placed
on the machine. When the scale has reached stability, a new reference weight is determined using the
quantity shown in the display and a new "average reference weight" is calculated. This procedure can
be repeated as often as required as long as the following rule is observed:

100
 No more parts may be placed on the scale than are already on the scale.

Reason: A reference weight calculation may only be carried out if the quantity on the scale is exactly
correct. It would not make sense to calculate the reference weight from 10 parts, add 1,000 parts and
then carry out the optimisation with 1,010 parts. There is a risk that, due to the production tolerance
of the parts or the measurement uncertainty of the scale, there are, for example, 1,009 or 1,011 parts
on the scale and that reference weight optimisation would result in a completely incorrect reference
weight. Therefore in this case the reference weight is not optimised. However, the reference weight
optimisation remains active. If more parts are placed on the scale than permitted for reference weight
optimisation and no reference weight optimisation is carried out initially, parts can be removed again.
As soon as the scale detects the smaller quantity, reference weight optimisation is carried out again.

The reference weight optimisation is switched on and off

in the setting mode under Program settings / Counting / Optimisation Ref. The percentage value
defines the percentage up to which the maximum load of the scale is to be optimised. Example: 0 =
off, 50% = 30kg for a scale with 60kg maximum load, 100% = 60kg for a scale with 60kg maximum
load.

Example of reference weight optimisation:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Referenc Ref.Optimisation Ref. optimization Ref.Optimisation Ref. Ref.Optimisatio
e quantity if there are if there are if there are optimization n
currently 10 parts currently 20 parts currently 40 parts with currently 80 with currently
on the scale, on the scale, on the scale, parts on the 160 parts on the
place additional place additional place additional scale, place scale, place
up to max. up to max. up to max. additional up to additional up to
max. max.
10 parts 20 counting 40 counting 80 counting 160 counting 320 counting
parts parts parts parts parts

> ADD- Mode

If the minimum reference weight is not reached, the parts are requested until the minimum reference
weight is reached. After the requested parts are placed on the scale (add xx pieces) the scale
calculates the reference weight.

Example of reference weight determination in ADD mode:

Smallest digit of the scale: 1g
Set minimum load: 10 d
Results in minimum load for reference weight determination: 10 g
Example for part weight: 0,8 g
Reference quantity: 10 pieces
Results in weight value for reference weight calculation: 8g
Difference to the set minimum load: 2g
ADD Mode requires parts: 3 pieces

101
6.7.11 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following options:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F2 Ref Fix
Displays the stored reference weights (Ref-Fix memory)
> F3 pieces contr.
Display of the current setpoint with tolerance
> F4 Total
Display of the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 Plus
Displays all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called up
with the arrow keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.7.12 Accepting current values into the fixed memory

For the direct transfer of reference weights and target values for piece control into the fixed memory, the
reference weight is first determined and the target value (piece) with tolerances is added.

Gross

pcs

Press the F5 key to confirm. Fix at the 3rd function key level opens the Ref-Fix memory. The reference weight,
the target weight and the tolerances are already stored.
The article description and the article number are added.

102
The designation of the reference weight is entered by pressing the F6 key "Edit". Enter the designation with
the keypad and confirm the entry by pressing the F6 key "Accept". The article number is entered in the same
way.

6.7.13 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.7.14 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in setting mode, you can adapt the Counting application program to your individual
requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

3 Counting

Standard reference quantity Input of the standard reference quantity in pieces via numeric keypad e.g. 10
Appears in the Counting program under the F1 key e.g. Ref 10
Factory setting: 10

Minimum reference weight Enter the minimum reference weight using the numeric keypad.
The minimum reference weight applies to the total weight of the reference parts.
The basis for the calculation is the smallest digit (d) of the scale.
The factory setting is 10 digits.
Values between 1 and 50 are possible.
Example of a scale with 1 g digit:
Factory setting is 10 d = 10 g for the total weight of the reference parts.
If you reduce the factory setting to 5 d, the scale will accept 5 g as
Minimum weight for the total weight of the reference parts.
If you increase the factory setting to 20 d, the scale requires 20 g as minimum
weight for the total weight of the reference parts.
When the ADD mode is activated, the scale requests the missing parts until the
minimum reference weight is reached. If the calculated reference weight is less
than 10% of the smallest digit of the scale the error message "Error 04 Reference
weight too small" is displayed.

Optimisation of reference Input percentage value

103
weight The scale optimises the reference weight when additional parts are placed on the
scale.
The upper limit of the optimisation will be entered in percent of the weighing range.
Example: 50% of the weighing range 60 kg, optimisation takes place up to 30 kg.
Example: 0%, optimisation switched off.

Add Mode selection: off or on, factory setting: on

When "on", the display unit requests the missing parts with a message (Add xx
pieces) until the minimum reference weight is reached.

Optimisation delay Enter the value for the speed of reference weight calculation and reference weight
optimisation between 500 and 5,000 milliseconds. Factory setting 500msec. If
unstable ambient conditions lead to inaccurate reference weights, the calculation
time can be extended to obtain more accurate reference weights.

Preferred reference scale Selection: None, scale 1, scale 2, scale 3...

Determination of which scale should preferably be connected for the reference
weight determination. If REF10 or REFVariable is pressed, the display for reference
weight determination automatically switches to the scale defined here. After the
reference weight has been determined, the display switches back to the last
selected bulk scale.
Factory setting: none

3 Counting

+/- tolerance separated Selection from or on

Selection on means that + and - tolerances for the piece control can be defined and
queried separately.
Selection Off means that tolerance is only queried once and is therefore equal for +
and -
Factory setting: off

Data record out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is specified whether a data record may be sent to the printer or EDP only
within the tolerance or also outside it. If the data record is also accepted outside
the tolerance, it is marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

Summation out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether summations into the totalizing memory may only be
made for values within the tolerance or also for values outside the tolerance.
Factory setting: Outside

Delete total before new Select from or on.

reference weight Selection On means that the totalizing memory must first be cleared before a new
reference weight can be determined. This prevents different counting parts from
being added together.
Factory setting: off

Totalizing or picking Select Totalize or Pick for the following settings.

Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale. Factory
setting: Totalisation

Auto totalizing / picking Select from or on.

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to

104
 weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> Function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

3 Counting

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to
allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

Fixed values Reference Editing fixed values reference weight

weight Selection of existing fixed values from the list
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit,
input via keyboard. Confirm the input with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.
Delete an existing fixed value
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.
Save new fixed value
Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the machine. The first number in
brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number
indicates the memory locations occupied by fixed values.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6 Confirm.

105
 (Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

Fixed value Call Selection whether the fixed value is called up via memory location number or
article number.
Factory setting: Article number

Delete reference weights Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all fixed values in the REF-Fix memory.

3 Counting

IO preassignment Select Do not execute or execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Launch mode Select from or on.

If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after
reaching the respective activated switching points. The scale can then be unloaded
without deactivating the switching point and thus starting a new process
unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F6 Start key in the
level Control functions.
Factory setting: off

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Count: Toggling between the individual functions used, counting with the
reference weight and weight value in gross / net e.g. checkweighing, totalizing
memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Fixed values reference weight: Continuous display of the activated reference
weight memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value or counter value
> Volume: display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Counting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

106
6.8 Checking

Checking is checking whether the sample corresponds to a target weight within a specified tolerance range.

This function can also be used for weighing to a specified setpoint with a lower and upper tolerance limit.

Tolerance deviations from the target value can be determined in the adjusted unit or in %.

In the program settings for control, the setpoint comparison with the current measured value (factory setting)
or totalizing memory can be selected.

After placing the weighing product on the scale, the display shows the actual weight and the control range by
means of a control light with the colours yellow / green / red including the respective range symbol, which
visualises the deviation from the preset target value.

Control areas: under tolerance | within tolerance (exactly reached with setpoints) | above tolerance

6.8.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in three levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key .

1. Control functions level:

Target Contr.
Total Cancel Add
value Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Tare functions level:

Tare Add Int. Multi Save

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3. Setting functions level:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

107
6.8.2 Display view

Gross

Set Check
point fix Total Clear Plus

Tip: For an additional display of, for example, the setpoint or the difference to the setpoint, you can press the
F3 key to open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary
display is made in the setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Illustration display secondary display with difference to setpoint

Gross

Set Check
point fix Total Clear Plus

108
6.8.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / check / display information field, you can set which data are
displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control light, totalizing memory,
organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Check fixed values: Continuous display of the activated control fix memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: Display Barcode128 with the current stability weight value.
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement function.

Example Setting Display Information field on control display:

1. Under tolerance 2. within tolerance 3. Above tolerance

(setpoints reached exactly)

6.8.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

6.8.5 Control functions

Input setpoints
In level 1 Control functions, press the F1 setpoint key.
You can now place a sample part to accept the setpoint or enter the setpoint in the adjusted unit with the
numeric keypad. Confirm with the F6 key Accept.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the accepted tolerance in the adjusted unit or in percent and confirm with
the F6 Accept key. Switch between units and percent with the key.
If you want to define plus and minus tolerance separately, activate
+/- tolerance separately in setting mode.
Depending on the setting of the information field or the secondary display, the display switches to the
respective display view Check, the traffic lights and special characters are activated. The corresponding
traffic light or special characters are displayed according to the actual status on the scale for the setpoint.

109
 Control status Traffic light colour Special characters
Below tolerance limit Yellow
Within tolerance Green
Setpoint reached exactly Green

Above tolerance limit Red

In the secondary display with the Control light setting, no symbols are displayed but only the colours in the
display field of the secondary display.

If a memory location has been activated from the contr. fix memory which contains a setpoint and tolerance
value, the control functions traffic light / symbols are automatically activated according to the settings.

Display setpoint and tolerance

The currently used setpoints can be queried with the key sequence and F3 Setpoint.

New setpoint
Existing setpoints are overwritten by a new setpoint entry

Stop checking
Deleting the saved setpoint terminates the check procedure and leads to the weight display.
Press F1 Setpoint, then press the key or directly using the key .

Check fixed values (Contr. Fix)

You can store up to 999 setpoints in a power-failure-proof database.
Each memory location has the following entries:
> Three-digit serial number
> Description (alphanumeric max. 18 characters)
> Article number (alphanumeric max. 18 digits)
> setpoint
> Tolerance minus
> Tolerance plus

a) Call up the list of fixed values control weights to edit the fixed values:
Press key and then F2 Contr.

Selection of existing fixed values from the list

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached, accept the desired fixed
value with F6 Edit.
Direct access via article number or memory location number. Enter the article number or memory location
number with the numeric keypad. Whether to call the item number or memory location number is specified in
the setting mode. Enter the article number as a search criterion left-justified and the memory location
number as a search criterion right-justified. Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

110
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Edit the selected fixed value with F6 Edit.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard.
Accept the input with F6 (Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are edited in the same way. Only the same number of decimal places can be used for the
tolerance fields minus and plus.

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4 or call via the article number or the consecutive number.
Delete the called fixed value with F2 Delete. Answer the security query with YES.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Save new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in brackets indicates the number of
free memory locations, the second number indicates the occupied memory locations.
Parameter Name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via the keyboard.
Accept the input with F6 (cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way. Only the same number of decimal places can be used for
the tolerance fields minus and plus.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

b) Call up the list of fixed values for control weights for checking:
In level 1 Control functions, press the F2 Contr. fix key.
The display shows the last fixed value called up

Selection within the list

> Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached,
accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept
> Direct access via article number or memory location numberEnter
the article or memory location number with the numeric keypad.
(Determine whether the article number or memory location number is called up in setting mode, enter
the article number as search criterion left-justified, enter the memory location number as search
criterion right-justified) Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept

When the fixed value is called up, setpoints and tolerances for checking are also accepted, if they have been
saved.
Press the CL key to delete the read-only memory from the main memory.
Delete all stored reference weights using the "Delete reference weights" function in setting mode

Note
If the fixed memory recall via barcode function is activated and a fixed value not contained in the fixed
memory is recalled, the error message "Error 83 - Fixed value not available" is displayed. You are returned to
the weighing mode and the selected function is deleted.

111
Switching points during control
If you want to transmit the control values via the interface, e.g. to a control traffic light or to a controller, an
I/O card must be installed in the device. This I/O card must be activated in setting mode under Program
settings / Control / IO preassignment with Execute. The output signals are assigned as follows:

Switching point Signal

S1Weight weight over tolerance
S2not active
S3Weight weight within tolerance
S4Weight weight under tolerance
S5empty message
S6Weight weight over tolerance

The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside a defined tolerance range can be prevented or accepted. If a data record
is released outside the tolerance range, it is marked with a special character. Release or block in setting
mode under Program settings / Check / Data record out of tolerance.

6.8.6 Totalizing and picking

This function is also available in Control mode. This function can be used to totalize/pick control goods. The
totalizing functions are controlled with function keys on the control function level.

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other, the weight in the totalizing memory is added
and the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale.
The weight is added in the total memory and the scale returns to zero without unloading.
It is not allowed to change measuring points during the picking process.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings.
The selection applies to all connected weighbridges.
The following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory.
The totalizing memory must then be cleared.

112
Operation of the totalizing functions
Use the function change key to call up the totalizing functions level

Plus F6
By pressing the F6 Plus key, the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are increased by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in the setting
mode.
A weight value with 0 or summation without unload is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight" (with unload
factor = 0 only a weight change is necessary).
Gross, tare and net weights are added together.

cancellation F5
Individual items can be cancelled or weighed back with the F5 Cancel key.
After pressing the cancel key, you are prompted either to load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the
consecutive number of the weight to be cancelled.
You can obtain information on the consecutive number in advance by using the key combination and F5
Plus.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled and confirm with F6
Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, the weight value is taken from the scale when key F6 is pressed. If the
scale is not loaded, error message Error 46 is displayed.
Cancellation or backweighing is indicated in the print document by the designation cancellation.
The consecutive number is incremented by one and the item counter is decremented by one.
If the item counter is at 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by error message Error 48.

Total F4 or with the CL key

Press the F4 Total key to complete the totalizing operation.
The display now shows the gross, tare and net total, as well as the transaction counter and consecutive
number of the last operation.

Selection options for displaying the total

Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totalsAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.
> Display of totals only
After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Delete total to delete the total memory, followed by the confirmation prompt Delete
total? Pressing the keys F1 to F3 YES to delete the totalizing memory, while pressing the keys F34 to
F6 NO does not delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the key F6 Back.

113
Relief factor for summation
(Parameter is not used in the picking function)
In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
time you place each item on the scale in the totalizing function. If the scale is not unloaded, the weight value
is not saved in the totalizing memory and is displayed with the error message Error 55 Place weight on scale.
This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

Auto-Summing
In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.
Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
taken over into the totalizing memory after unloading (only for totalizing) and placing on weight and after
standstill.
If the autototalizing function is interrupted by a cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
autototalizing must be restarted with the Plus key.
Info: Like manual totalizing, auto totalizing can be defined as a condition that triggers printing (see chapter
on printing).
During auto-picking, a load < 5 digits is not automatically stored, but weights < 5 digits can be manually
stored in the picking memory by pressing the F6 Plus key.

Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, cancellation) in the totalizing memory is assigned a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> Clearing the totalizing memory
> Switching off the terminal
> Function key: F1 delete current number when called up with the keys and F4 total.

Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new
transaction with plus or automatic totalizing, the transaction counter is incremented by 1. The transaction
counter runs up to 999, after which the error message Error 45 appears. If the transaction is cancelled, the
transaction counter is reduced by 1.
The transaction counter is automatically set to zero each time the total is cleared.

Print triggering keys

Additional keys or functions such as Plus, Cancel and Total can be used with the Totalizing / Picking function
as print-triggering keys, e.g. for printing a document. A prerequisite is that a print image has been stored for
the respective key.
In setting mode, you must set the totalizing key function to "Display, print
and delete" or delete the total with the F2 key.

Display current totals

Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by pressing and then press the key F4
Sum. You can delete the totals with the F2 key and the consecutive number (if only "Display" is activated in
setting mode under the function "Total key") or return to the totalizing mode with the F6 Back key.

114
Display Current totals view:

Info: Display information field with current totals

In setting mode / program settings / check / display information field, the total can be set, then the total is
always displayed in the information field.

Display individual items

Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing
the and the F5 Plus key in
succession. The list of items starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Info: Display information field with item list

In the setting mode / program settings / check / display information field the last item can be set, then the
last item is always displayed in the information field.

115
Summation of control items out of tolerance
The accumulation of control items that lie outside a specified tolerance range can be prevented. If the weight
value is outside the tolerance, the error message Error 27 "Out of tolerance" is displayed after pressing the F6
Plus key.
To do this, set "Within" in the setting mode under Program settings / Check / Totalisation out of tolerance.

6.8.7 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F2 Contr. Fix
Display of the stored fixed values Check (Contr. Fix memory)
> F3 Setpoints
Display of the active setpoint with tolerances
> F4 Total
Display of the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 Plus
Displays all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called up
with the arrow keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.8.8 Saving current values to the fixed memory

For the direct transfer of setpoints with tolerances into the fixed memory, first transfer the setpoint with
tolerances.

Gross

Press the F5 key to confirm. Fix at the 2nd function key level opens the contr. fix memory. The target weight
and tolerances are already stored.
The article description and the article number are added.

116
The input window for the setpoint value appears.

The designation of the setpoint is entered by pressing the F6 Edit key. Enter the designation with the
keyboard and confirm your entry by pressing the F6 key.
The article number is entered in the same way.

6.8.9 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.8.10 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in setting mode, you can adapt the Check application program to your individual
requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

4 Check

+/- tolerance separated Selection from or on

Selection on means that + and - tolerances for the piece control can be defined and
queried separately.
Selection Off means that tolerance is only queried once and is therefore equal for +
and -
Factory setting: off

Data record out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is specified whether a data record may be sent to the printer or EDP only
within the tolerance or also outside it. If the data record is also accepted outside
the tolerance, it is marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

117
4 Check

Summation out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether summations into the totalizing memory may only be
made for values within the tolerance or also for values outside the tolerance.
Factory setting: Outside

Totalizing or picking Select Totalize or Pick for the following settings.

Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale.
Factory setting: summation

Auto totalizing / picking Select from or on.

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to
weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> Function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to
allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

118
4 Check

Check fixed values Editing fixed values Check

Selection of existing fixed values from the list
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit,
input via keyboard. Confirm the input with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.
Delete an existing fixed value
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.
Save new fixed value
Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the machine. The first number in
brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number
indicates the memory locations occupied by fixed values.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6 Confirm.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

Fixed value Call Selection whether the fixed value is called up via memory location number or
article number.
Factory setting: Article number

Delete control settings Selection Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all fixed values Check

IO preassignment Selection Do not execute or Execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Setpoint comparison Selection

With current measured value
The setpoint comparison is always made with the current weight display.
With totalizing memory
The setpoint comparison is made with the totalizing memory.
Factory setting: With current measured value

119
 4 Check

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control
light, totalizing memory, organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Check fixed values: Continuous display of the activated setpoint memory
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value or counter value
> Volume: display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

6.9 Classification

Classification of weighing goods in up to 5 classes.

With this function weighing goods can be assigned to defined weight classes.
By means of the switching function a manual or automatic sorting can be carried out subsequently.
The classes are indicated by numbers in the information field.
Special characters for "Under minimum load" and "Above upper limit highest class".

6.9.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in three levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key .

1. Classification functions level:

Target Class.
Total Cancel Add
values Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Tare functions level:

Tare Add Int. Multi Save

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

120
3. Setting functions level:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

6.9.2 Display view

Example :
Weighing part in weight class 3

Gross

Tip: For an additional display, e.g. the 10-fold higher resolution or the tare weight, you can press the F3 key to
open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary display is
made in setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Illustration display secondary display with x10 resolution

Gross

121
6.9.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / classification / display information field, you can set which data are
displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Switch between the individual functions used, e.g. classification, totalizing memory,
organization data memory.
> Classify: Continuous display of the classification function
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Classify fixed values: Continuous display of the activated classification fixed memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement function.

6.9.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

6.9.5 Classification functions

Input setpoints
In level 1 Classification functions, press the F1 key Setpoints. The display shows the Class limits table with
the last active values.
Move with the arrow mark in the list using the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the selected class boundary to be edited with F6 Edit.
The lower limit of class 1 must be entered as weight value, standard dimension is the adjusted unit.
Select whether the weight is to be entered in grams or kilograms using the key,
Prerequisite for the 2nd unit is that the respective unit such as g or kg is activated.
Enter the lower limit of the Class 1 unit with the numeric keypad. Confirm with F6 Accept and the terminal
then jumps to the next parameter.
Enter the upper limits of classes 1 to 5 as a weight value or as a percentage of the lower limit class 1, select
Weight or Percent with the function change key .
Enter the value 0 for classes that are not to be allocated.

After entering the values, leave the Class boundaries table by pressing F1 Activate. Depending on the setting
of the information field or the secondary display, the display switches to the respective display view Classify,
the traffic lights and special characters are activated.
Onlaid control pieces are now displayed with weight, the weight class and the following special characters:

122
 Classification status Traffic light colour Special characters
Lower limit class 1 Yellow
Upper limit class 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 Green 1…5

Above upper limit highest class Red

If a memory location that contains setpoints has been activated from the Class Fix memory, the special
characters are activated automatically.

New setpoints
Existing setpoints are overwritten by a new setpoint entry

Display setpoints
The currently used setpoints can be queried with the key sequence and F3 Setpoints

Display and editing of the currently activated class boundaries

Press the F1 key Setpoints. The currently activated class limits are displayed.
F5 Cancel leads you back to the classification. F6 Edit allows you to modify the class boundaries. The
modification is accepted after pressing F1 Activate.

Exit Classification
Deleting the saved setpoints terminates the classification process and leads to the weight display.
Press the key sequence F1 Setpoint and F2 Delete or just the key .

Classify fixed values (Class. Fix)

You can store up to 999 setpoints in a power-failure-proof database.
Each memory location has the following entries:
> Three-digit serial number
> Description (alphanumeric max. 18 characters)
> Article number (alphanumeric max. 18 digits)
> lower limit class 1
> Upper limit class 1
…
> Upper limit class 5

a) Call up the list Classify fixed values for processing the fixed values
Press the key and then press F2 Class. Fix

Selection of existing fixed values from the list

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached, accept the desired fixed
value with F6 Edit.
Direct access via article number or memory location number. Enter the article number or memory location
number with the numeric keypad. Whether to call the item number or memory location number is specified in
the setting mode. Enter the article number as a search criterion left-justified and the memory location
number as a search criterion right-justified. Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

123
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Edit the selected fixed value with F6 Edit.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard.
Accept the input with F6 (Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are edited in the same way.

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4 or call via the article number or the consecutive number.
Delete the called fixed value with F2 Delete. Answer the security query with YES.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Save new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in brackets indicates the number of
free memory locations, the second number indicates the occupied memory locations.
Parameter Name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via the keyboard.
Accept the input with F6 (cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

b) Call up the list of fixed values for control weights for checking:
In level 1 Control functions, press the F2 Class key. Fixed.
The display shows the last fixed value called up

Selection within the list

> Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached,
accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept
> Direct access via article number or memory location numberEnter
the article or memory location number with the numeric keypad.
(Determine whether the article number or memory location number is called up in setting mode, enter
the article number as search criterion left-justified, enter the memory location number as search
criterion right-justified) Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept

When the fixed value is called up, setpoints for classification are also accepted, if saved with . Delete all
stored reference weights with the function "Delete class fixed values" in setting mode.

Note
If the fixed memory recall via barcode function is activated and a fixed value that is not contained in the fixed
memory is recalled, the error message "Error 83 Fixed value not available" is displayed.
You are returned to the weighing mode and the selected function is deleted.

124
Switching functions
If you want to transmit the control values via the interface, e.g. to a control traffic light or a controller, an I/O
card must be installed in the terminal. This must be activated in setting mode under Program settings /
Classify / IO preassignment with Execute. The output signals are assigned as follows:

Switching point Signal

S1Weight value below class
S2Weight value lower limit class 1
S3 weight value upper limit class 1
S4Weight value upper limit class 2
S5 weight value upper limit class 3
S6Weight value upper limit class 4

The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside the defined classes can be prevented or accepted. If a data record is
released outside of classes, it is marked with a special character. Enabling or disabling in setting mode under
Program settings / Classification / Data record outside class.

6.9.6 Totalizing and picking

This function is also available in Classify mode. With this function, items with a class assignment can be
totaled/picked. The totalizing functions are controlled with function keys on the Classification Functions
level.

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other, the weight in the total memory is added and
the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale.
The weight is added in the total memory and the scale returns to zero without unloading.
It is not allowed to change measuring points during the picking process.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings.
The selection applies to all connected weighbridges.
The following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory. Afterwards, the totalizing memory must
be cleared.

125
Operation of the totalizing functions
Use the function change key to call up the totalizing functions level

Plus F6
By pressing the F6 Plus key, the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are increased by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in the setting
mode.
A weight value with 0 or summation without unload is displayed with error 55 Apply weight (with unload
factor = 0 only a weight change is necessary).
Gross, tare and net weights are added together.

cancellation F5
Individual items can be cancelled or weighed back with the F5 Cancel key.
After pressing the cancel key, you are prompted either to load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the
consecutive number of the weight to be cancelled.
You can obtain information on the consecutive number in advance by using the key combination and F5
Plus.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled and confirm with F6
Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, the weight value is taken from the scale when key F6 is pressed. If the
scale is not loaded, error message Error 46 is displayed.
Cancellation or backweighing is indicated in the print document by the designation cancellation.
The consecutive number is incremented by one and the item counter is decremented by one.
If the item counter is at 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by error message Error 48.

Total F4 or with the CL key

Press the F4 Total key to complete the totalizing operation.
The display now shows the gross, tare and net total, as well as the transaction counter and consecutive
number of the last operation.

Selection options for displaying the total

Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totalsAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.

> Display of totals only

After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Delete total to delete the total memory, followed by the confirmation prompt Delete
total? Pressing the keys F1 to F3 YES to delete the totalizing memory, while pressing the keys F34 to
F6 NO does not delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the key F6 Back.

126
Relief factor for summation
(Parameter is not used in the picking function)
In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
time you place each item on the scale in the totalizing function. If the scale is not unloaded, the weight value
is not saved in the totalizing memory and is displayed with the error message Error 55 Place weight on scale.
This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

Auto-Summing
In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.
Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
taken over into the totalizing memory after unloading (only for totalizing) and placing on weight and after
standstill.
If the autototalizing function is interrupted by a cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
autototalizing must be restarted with the Plus key.
Info: Like manual totalizing, auto totalizing can be defined as a condition that triggers printing (see chapter
on printing).
During auto-picking, a load < 5 digits is not automatically stored, but weights < 5 digits can be manually
stored in the picking memory by pressing the F6 Plus key.

Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, cancellation) in the totalizing memory is assigned a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> Clearing the totalizing memory
> Switching off the terminal
> Function key: F1 delete current number when called up with the keys and F4 total.

Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new
transaction with plus or automatic totalizing, the transaction counter is incremented by 1. The transaction
counter runs up to 999, after which the error message Error 45 appears. If the transaction is cancelled, the
transaction counter is reduced by 1.
The transaction counter is automatically set to zero each time the total is cleared.

Print triggering keys

Additional keys or functions such as Plus, Cancel and Total can be used with the Totalizing / Picking function
as print-triggering keys, e.g. for printing a document. A prerequisite is that a print image has been stored for
the respective key.
In setting mode, you must set the totalizing key function to "Display, print
and delete" or delete the total with the F2 key.

Display current totals

Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by successively pressing
and then press the key F4 Sum.
You can delete the totals with the F2 key and the consecutive number (if only "Display" is activated in setting
mode under the function "Total key") or return to the totalizing mode with the F6 Back key.

127
Display Current totals view:

Info: Display information field with current totals

In setting mode / program settings / classification / display information field, the total can be set, then the
total is always displayed in the information field.

Display individual items

Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing
the and the F5 Plus key in succession. The list of items starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Info: Display information field with item list

In the setting mode / program settings / classification / display information field the last item can be set,
then the last item is always displayed in the information field.

128
Summation of items outside classification
The summation of items that are outside the specified classification range can be prevented. If the weight
value lies outside the classification, the error message Error 27 Out of tolerance appears after pressing the
F6 Plus key.
To do this, you must set "Inside" in setting mode under Program settings / Classification / Totalisation
outside class.

6.9.7 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F2 Class. Fix
Display of the stored fixed values Class limits (Class. Fix memory)
> F3 Setpoints
Display of the active setpoint with tolerances
> F4 Total
Display of the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 Plus
Displays all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called up
with the arrow keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.9.8 Accepting current values into the fixed memory

For the direct transfer of setpoints with lower and upper limits into the fixed memory, first transfer the
setpoints with lower and upper limits.

Gross

Press the F5 key to confirm. The 2nd function key level is fixed to the class. Fix memory is opened. The
target weight and tolerances are already stored.
The article description and the article number are added.

129
The input window for the class boundaries appears.

To enter the designation of the class boundaries, press the F6 key Edit.
Enter the designation with the keyboard and confirm your entry by pressing the F6 key. The article number is
entered in the same way.

6.9.9 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.9.10 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in setting mode, you can adapt the Classify application program to your individual
requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

5 Classification

Record outside of class Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether a data record to printer or EDP may only be sent within
the class or also outside. If a data record is accepted outside the class, it is
marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

Totaling outside of class Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether summation may only be carried out for values within the
classes or also for values outside the classes.
Factory setting: Outside

130
5 Classification

Totalizing or picking Select Totalize or Pick for the following settings.

Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale.
Factory setting: summation

Auto totalizing / picking Select from or on.

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to
weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> Function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to
allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

131
5 Classification

Classify fixed values Edit fixed values Classify

Selection of existing fixed values from the list
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit,
input via keyboard. Confirm the input with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.
Delete an existing fixed value
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.
Save new fixed value
Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in
brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number
indicates the memory locations occupied by fixed values.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6 Confirm.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

Fixed value Call Selection whether the fixed value is called up via memory location number or
article number.
Factory setting: Article number

Delete class fixed values Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all fixed values Classify

IO preassignment Select Do not execute or execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Switch between the individual functions used, e.g.
classification, totalizing memory, organization data memory.
> Classify: Continuous display of the classification.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Classify fixed values: Continuous display of the activated classification
memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value or counter value
> Volume: display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

132
6.10 Recipe

One or more components of a recipe are weighed into a container one after the other. Each component is
transferred to the recipe total memory and the display goes to zero for weighing the next component.

6.10.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in three levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key .

1. Recipe functions level:

Comp.
Total Container Manual Add
contr.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Tare functions level:

Tare Add Int. Multi

Fix Tare Tare Tare

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3. Setting functions level:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

133
6.10.2 Display view

Tip: For an additional display, e.g. the 10-fold higher resolution or the tare weight, you can press the F3 key to
open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary display is
made in setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Illustration display secondary display with x10 resolution

134
6.10.3 Display information field

In Setting mode / Program settings / Recipe / Display information field, you can set which data are displayed
in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control traffic light, recipe
memory, organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last component: Continuous display of the last component.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Fixed tare values: Continuous display of the activated fixed tare memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight

Example Setting Display Information field on control display:

1. Under tolerance 2. Within tolerance 3. Above tolerance

(setpoints reached exactly)

6.10.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

6.10.5 Recipe functions

Place the first container on the scale and then tare.

Pour the first component of your recipe into the container.
Use the function change key to call up the recipe functions level

Plus F6
By pressing the F6 Plus key, the weight of the first component is stored in the totalizing memory. The display
changes to 0 and the transaction counter and consecutive number are incremented by 1. A weight value with
0 is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight" Depending
on the display setting, information field is shown in the display:
> the consecutive container number
> the number of components weighed in
> the total weight of the components weighed in

Other components are weighed in the same way.

135
Manual F5
You can add weight values and quantities (manual additions) manually with the F5 Manual key. Enter the
values with the numeric keypad and confirm your entry by pressing the F6 Accept key. In the input window,
you can switch between the adjusted unit, the second unit and the quantity with the function change key.
Manual entries are identified in the printout by the designation "Manual".
The item counter and the sequence number are incremented by 1. Weight values are added to the weight
total, piece numbers are added separately to the piece total.
Attention: Manual additions may only be added as the last component(s). Afterwards, no more weighing may
be carried out for this container, i.e. the plus key may no longer be used, otherwise the manual additions will
be included a second time in the weighing.

Container F4
A full container should be removed from the scale and replaced by an empty container.
Press the F4 Container key. The display shows the prompt "Clear the scale".
Now remove the full container from the scale.
The container counter is increased by 1, the component counter is set to zero and the existing tare weight is
deleted, the scale goes to zero and is ready to weigh again. Now the next container can be applied, tared and
filled.
> Option automatic container change-over: If you select the option automatic in setting mode under
Program settings / Recipe / Container change-over, the container can be changed without pressing the F4
key "Container".
> Autotare option: If you activate the Autotare option in Setting mode, the newly applied container is also
tared without pressing a key.

Total F3
After pressing the container key, remove the last container from the scale.
Press the F3 Total key to complete the recipe operation.
The display now shows the container, components, gross total, tare total, net total and piece total.

Selection options for displaying the total

The following functions can be assigned to the total function key in Setting mode/Program
Settings/Recipe/Composition/Function total key:

> Display, print and clear totalAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals of the container, components, gross total, tare total, net
total and piece total are displayed for 3 seconds, the memory contents are printed out and cleared at
the same time, the container counter is reset to zero. You can then start a new recipe operation.

> Display of totals only

After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Delete total to delete the total memory, followed by the confirmation prompt Delete
total? Pressing the keys F1 to F3 YES to delete the totalizing memory, while pressing the keys F34 to
F6 NO does not delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the key F6 Back.

136
Keys that trigger pressure:
Additional keys or functions such as Plus, Hand, Container and Total can be used as print-triggering keys, e.g.
for printing a document. A prerequisite is that a print image has been saved to the key.
The option "Display/Print/Clear" must be selected for the totalizing key in setting mode /Program settings/
Recipe/ Totalizing key function or you must delete the totalizing key by pressing the F2 Total key.

Component list display

Within the formulation into a container (i.e. before pressing the container key), you can display the
components formulated into this container.
Press the key and then press the F5 Plus key.
For the current container, the entry type, component no., tare value and net value are displayed.
All components can be called up individually using the arrow keys.
If the container has been closed with the container key, it can no longer be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to close the component list display.

Container list display

Within a recipe, you can display the finished containers in a list. Press the key and then the F4 Container
key.
The containers, the number of components per container and the net weight of the container are displayed.
Use the arrow keys to move in the list and mark individual containers to delete them from the list with the F2
key "Delete". If you have finished the recipe by pressing the totalizing key, you can no longer call up the list.

137
Display subtotals
Within a recipe, you can display the finished containers in a total list. Press the Info key and then the F3 key
"Sum".
Displayed are number of containers, number of components, gross total, tare total, net total and piece total. If
the recipe has been terminated via the totalizing key, the list can no longer be called up.

6.10.6 Component check

With the function "Component check", individual components can be weighed into a container with tolerance
control.
Example: You want to enable the weighing and transfer of a component only within a specified tolerance
range.

In level 1 Recipe functions, press the F1 Comp.contr. key. Enter the desired setpoint with the numeric keypad
and confirm with F6 Accept. Use the numeric keypad to enter the accepted tolerance in the weight unit or
percentage and confirm with F6 Accept.
Toggling between the weight unit and percent with the key.

If you want to define plus and minus tolerance separately, activate in setting mode / program settings /
recipe / +/- tolerance separately. Depending on the setting of the information field or the secondary display,
the display switches to the display view Check, the special characters are activated. The corresponding
special character is displayed according to the actual state on the scale for the setpoint.

Control status Traffic light colour Special characters

Below tolerance limit Yellow
Within tolerance Green
Setpoint reached exactly Green

Above tolerance limit Red

138
You can also have the difference to the target weight displayed in the top left-hand side of the secondary
display in figures with a + or - sign. Activate the secondary display with the F3 key Secondary display in level
3 Setting functions.

Pressing the plus key to store the component in the totalizing memory interrupts the display of the special
control characters and switches to the Recipe display until the scale is unloaded again. Then the special
control characters are reactivated.

Blocking the summation of items outside the tolerance

The summation of items that are outside the specified tolerance range can be prevented. If the weight is
outside the tolerance, the error message Error 27 "Out of tolerance" is displayed after pressing the F6 Plus
key. To do this, you must set "Within" in setting mode under Program settings / Recipe / Totalizing out of
tolerance.

Display setpoint and tolerance

Press the key and then press the F2 Comp.
Or: Press the "Comp. contr." key in level 1 Recipe functions.

Next component with modified target weight/tolerance

Press the F1 Comp.contr. key and enter the new target values with the numeric keypad.

Switching points during control

If you want to transmit the control values via the interface, e.g. to a control traffic light or a controller, an I/O
card must be installed in the terminal. This must be activated in setting mode under Setting
mode/Communication/IO control. Under Program settings / Recipe / IO preassignment with Execute the
following preassignment can be activated:

Switching point Signal

S1Weight weight over tolerance
S2 not active
S3Weight weight within tolerance
S4Weight weight under tolerance
S5 empty message
S6Weight weight over tolerance

The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside a defined tolerance range can be prevented or accepted. If a data record
is released outside the tolerance range, it is marked with a special character. Enable or disable in setting
mode under Program settings / Recipe / Data record out of tolerance.

Launch mode
If the start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after reaching the respective
defined switching point (S1 to S6). The scale can then be unloaded without deactivating the switching point
and thus starting a new process unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F2 Start key
in the recipe function level.
Activate the start mode in setting mode under Program settings / Recipe / Start mode.

139
6.10.7 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F2 Comp. contr.
Display of the active setpoint with tolerances for the components Control
> F3 Total
Display subtotals in the totalizing memory
> F4 Container
Displays finished containers
> F5 Plus
Shows all saved items in the component list. The individual items can be called up with the arrow
keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.10.8 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.10.9 Settings in Setting Mode

You can use the parameters in Setting mode to adapt the Recipe application program to your individual
requirements. To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key in the Setting functions level and
call up the program settings with F6 Accept. F6 Continue to call up the program settings for the selected
application program.

6 Recipe

Container change Manual or automatic selection

The container is closed manually by pressing a key.
Automatic The container is automatically closed when it is removed from the scale
or when the scale is empty.
Factory setting: Manual

+/- tolerance separated Selection from or on

Selection on causes + and - tolerance for component control to be defined and
queried separately.
Selection off means that tolerance is only queried once and is therefore equal for +
and -
Factory setting: off

140
6 Recipe

Data record out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is specified whether a data record may be sent to the printer or EDP only
within the tolerance or also outside it. If the data record is also accepted outside
the tolerance, it is marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

Summation out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether summations into the totalizing memory may only be
made for values within the tolerance or also for values outside the tolerance.
Factory setting: Outside

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

IO preassignment Selection Do not execute or Execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Launch mode Select from or on.

If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after
reaching the respective activated switching points (S1 to S6). The scale can then
be unloaded without deactivating the switching point and thus starting a new
process unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F2 Start
key in the recipe function level.
Factory setting: off

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control
traffic lights, recipe memory, organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last components: Continuous display of the last component.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Fixed tare values: Continuous display of the activated fixed tare value
memory.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

141
6.11 Neutral measurement

In neutral measurement, a specific weight is determined and assigned to a different physical quantity. By
knowing the specific weight, length, area and volume measurements can be made with the scale. The scale
then displays the selected unit instead of the weight value.

6.11.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned to four levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key .

1. Neutral measurement functions level:

Spec. New
Spec.
UoM. Total Cancel Add
Variab weight
Fix
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Control functions level:

Quantities
Start
contr.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3. Tare functions level:

Tare Add Int. Multi Save

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

4. Setting functions level

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

142
6.11.2 Display view

Tip: For an additional display of, for example, the specific weight, net weight or tare weight, you can press the
F3 key to open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary
display is made in the setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Figure: Secondary display with specific weight

143
6.11.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / neutral measurement / display information field, you can set which
data is displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control light, totalizing memory,
organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Fixed values Neutral measurement: Continuous display of the activated memory of the specific
weight.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight value or specific value.
> Volume: Display volume only after activating the volume measurement function.

Example Setting Display information field to fixed values Neutral measurement:

Net

Example control display, a traffic light display is available in the information field.

1. Under tolerance 2. Within tolerance 3. About tolerance

(setpoints reached exactly)

144
6.11.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

6.11.5 Neutral measurement functions

Define format of the measured variable

The desired number of decimal places of the desired measurable variable must be set in Setting mode /
Program settings / Neutral measurement under Display format Decimal places the desired number is set.

Define unit of the measured variable

Unit of the desired measured variable must be set in Setting mode / Program settings / Neutral
measurement Under Display unit the 3-digit unit is set.

Determination of specific weight

The determination of the specific weight is possible with the following keys in level 1 Functions Neutral
measurement:

> Spez VariabDetermination of

the specific weight from freely selected reference quantity.
Place the reference quantity on the scale.
Press the F1 Spez Variab key and enter the number (1 to 9999) of the units of measure on the scale
using the numeric keypad. Press the F6 Accept key.
The terminal determines the specific weight and then displays the number of units of measure on the
scale. Any further material placed on the machine is displayed continuously.

> Specific weight

Input of a known specific weight. Press the F2 Spez Gew key and enter the known specific weight
with the numeric keypad.
An existing specific weight is displayed and can be overwritten. By default, the entry is made in the
unit "grams". If you want to enter the reference weight in "kilograms", you can change
the unit with the key . Confirm your entry with F6 Accept.
The terminal has stored the reference weight and displays the number of pieces on the machine.

New specific gravity

Existing specific weights are overwritten by a new weight entry and determination or by taking over a new
fixed value from the fixed memory.

Display specific weight

Press the F2 special weight key or activate the secondary display continuously (see section 6.11.2)

End neutral measurement

The specific weight display is ended by deleting the specific weight.
The specific weight can be set by pressing the F2 Special Weight and F2 Delete keys or simply by pressing
the key . The display shows the current weight value.

145
Fixed values Neutral measurement (New.Me Fix)
You can store up to 999 specific weights in a power-failure-proof memory.
Each memory location has the following entries:

> Three-digit serial number

> Description (alphanumeric max. 18 characters)
> Article number (alphanumeric max. 18 digits)
> Specific gravity
> Setpoint
> Tolerance minus
> Tolerance plus

a) Call for the New. Me. Fix memory to edit the fixed values:
Press key and then F2 New. Me. Fix

Selection of existing fixed values from the list

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached, accept the desired fixed
value with F6 Edit.
Direct access via article number or memory location number. Enter the article number or memory location
number with the numeric keypad. Whether to call the item number or memory location number is specified in
the setting mode. Enter the article number as a search criterion left-justified and the memory location
number as a search criterion right-justified. Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

Edit an existing fixed value from the list

Edit the selected fixed value with F6 Edit.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Accept the input with F6 (Cancel
without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are edited in the same way.

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4 or call via the article number or the consecutive number.
Delete the called fixed value with F2 Delete. Answer the security question with YES.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Save new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in brackets indicates the number
of free memory locations, the second number indicates the occupied memory locations.
Parameter Name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via the keyboard. Accept the input with F6 (cancel
without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

146
b) Call up the list of specific weights to use the fixed values
In level 1 Neutral measurement, press the key F3 New.Me.Fix.
The display shows the last fixed value called up.

Selection within the list

> Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached,
accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept.
> Direct access via article number or memory location numberEnter
the article or memory location number with the numeric keypad.
(Determine whether the article number or memory location number is called up in setting mode, enter the
article number as search criterion left-justified, enter the memory location number as search criterion
right-justified).

When the fixed value is called up, the setpoint and tolerances are also accepted for control purposes, if
saved.
Delete all stored reference weights with the function "Delete neutral reference values" in setting mode.

Note
If the "Display bar code" function is enabled and a fixed value memory that is not in the fixed memory is
recalled, the error message "Error 83 - Fixed value not available" is displayed. You are returned to the
weighing mode and the selected function is deleted.

6.11.6 Totalizing and picking

This function is also available in Neutral Measurement.

With this function, items of the same units can be totalised/commissioned.
The totalizing functions are controlled via function keys of the 1st level Functions Neutral measurement.

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other the weight in the total memory is added and
the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale.
The weight is added in the total memory and the scale returns to zero without unloading.
It is not allowed to change measuring points during the picking process.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings.
The selection applies to all connected weighbridges.
The following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory.
The totalizing memory must then be cleared.

147
Display view
After the first totalisation, the display changes from the basic Specific Weight view to the Totalizing view if
the "Information field display" setting is set to factory default.

Net

Operation of the totalizing functions

Call up the 1st level Functions Neutral measurement with the function change key.

> Plus F6
By pressing the Plus key the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are incremented by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in the
setting mode.
A weight value with 0 or totalisation without unload is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight". With
unload factor = 0 only one weight change is necessary.
Gross, tare and net values and quantities are totalised.

> Cancel F5 With

the cancel key, individual items can be cancelled or weighed back. After pressing the cancel key, you
are prompted to either load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the consecutive number of the
weight to be cancelled.
For information on the consecutive number, use the key combination Info and plus F5.
enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled using the numeric keypad and confirm with
F6 Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, pressing F6 will cause the weight value to be taken from the
scale. If the scale is not loaded, an error message is displayed.
Cancellation or backweighing is indicated in the printout by the word "cancellation". The consecutive
number is incremented by one and the transaction counter is decremented by one.
If the transaction counter is set to 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by an error message
Error 48.

> Total F4 or with the CL keyThe

totalizing operation is terminated with the Total key.
The display now shows the gross, tare, net and quantity totals, as well as the transaction counter and
consecutive number of the last operation.

148
Selection options for displaying the total
Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totalsAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.
> Display totals only
After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 Clear total key to delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the F6 Back key.

Relief factor for summation

(Cannot be activated during picking)
In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
placement of each item on the scale
. This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

Auto-Summing
In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.
Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
loaded according to weight and stability are stored in the totalizing memory.
As long as Auto-Summing is active, the plus key is dimmed.
If the auto-summing is interrupted by cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
then Auto-Summing must be started again with the Plus key.
Info: Auto-summing can be defined as a print triggering condition just like manual summing
(see chapter 8 Printing).

Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, cancellation) in the totalizing memory is assigned a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> with key Delete total
> Switching off the terminal
> Function key "delete current number

Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new
transaction with plus or automatic totalizing, the transaction counter is incremented by 1. The transaction
counter runs up to 999, after which an error message is displayed. If the transaction is cancelled, the
transaction counter is reduced by 1.
The transaction counter is automatically set to zero when the total is cleared.

Print triggering keys

The Plus, Cancellation and Total keys can trigger a document printout.
A prerequisite is that a print image has been saved for the relevant key.
For the totalizing key, the option "Display, print
and delete" must be selected.

149
Display current totals
Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by successively pressing
followed by pressing the key F4 Total
You can delete the totals with key F2 Total and delete the key F1 for the current number F1 (if activated in
setting mode) or return to the totalizing function with key F6.

Display individual items

Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing the
key and the plus key F5 in succession. The item list starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Totalizing outside tolerance

The accumulation of quantities that are outside a specified tolerance range can be prevented. If the quantity
is outside the tolerance, the error message "Out of tolerance" is displayed after pressing the Plus key.
To do this, you must switch off in setting mode under "Totalizing out of tolerance". You define the target
quantity and the permitted tolerance in the piece control mode.
For more information see Quantity control.

150
Summation of different parts
The summation of different parts can be prevented by enabling the determination of a new specific weight
only after clearing the totalizing memory by pressing "Clear total" in the setting mode.

6.11.7 Quantity control

With the quantity control function, goods with tolerance control can be dosed into a container or quantities
can be controlled.

To call up the quantity check, you must already be in Neutral Measurement mode, i.e. you must have defined
a specific weight.

In level 2 Control Functions, press the key F5 Quantities Contr. You can now use the numeric keypad to enter
the setpoint in the set unit. Confirm with the F6 key Accept.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the accepted tolerance in the set unit or as a percentage and confirm with
the F6 Accept key. Switching between the unit and the percentage with the key.

If you want to define plus and minus tolerance separately, activate in the setting mode under program
settings / neutral measurement / +/- tolerance separately with "on".

The display switches to the display view Check, the traffic light function with the special characters is
activated. The corresponding traffic light colour with special characters is displayed according to the actual
status on the scale for the setpoint.

Control status Traffic light colour Special characters

Below tolerance limit Yellow
Within tolerance Green
Setpoint reached exactly Green

Above tolerance limit Red

You can also have the difference to the target weight displayed in the top left-hand side of the secondary
display in figures with a + or - sign. Activate the secondary display with the F3 key Secondary display in level
4 Setting functions.

Display setpoint and tolerance

Press the key and then press F3 Quantities Contr.

151
Switching points for quantity control
If you want to transmit the control values via the interface, e.g. to a control traffic light or to a controller, an
I/O card must be installed in the device. This I/O card must be activated in the setting mode under Program
settings / Neutral measurement / IO. The output signals are assigned as follows:

Switching point Signal

S1 Weight weight over tolerance
S2 not active
S3 Weight weight within tolerance
S4 Weight weight under tolerance
S5 empty message
S6 Weight weight over tolerance

The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Launch mode
If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after reaching the respective
activated switching points. The scale can then be unloaded without deactivating the switching point and thus
starting a new process unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F6 Start key in the
level Control functions.
Activate the start mode in the setting mode under Program settings / Neutral measurement / Start mode.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside a defined tolerance range can be prevented or accepted. If a data record
is released outside the tolerance range, it is marked with a special character. Enable or disable in setting
mode under Program settings / Neutral measurement / Data record out of tolerance.

End quantity control

Use the function change key to call up the 2nd level of control functions and press key F5 Quantities
contrast, then delete using key F2 Delete or complete deletion using the key .

6.11.8 Neutral measurement with several weighing bridges

If several scales are connected, the specific weight can be determined on each scale. For best results, it is
recommended to determine the specific weight on the scale with the finest numerical increment. Select the
scale with the scale key.
After determining the specific weight, it is possible to switch to a higher capacity bulk scale in order to be
able to measure large quantities precisely with the reference weight determined on the reference scale.

152
6.11.9 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F2 New Me Fix
Display of stored fixed values Neutral measurement (New.Me.Fix memory)
> F3 Quantities contr.
Display of the current setpoint with tolerance
> F4 Total
Display of the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 Plus
Display of all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called
up with the arrow keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.11.10 Accepting current values into the fixed memory

For the direct transfer of specific weight and quantity control into the fixed memory, first determine the
specific weight and enter the target values with tolerances.

Gross

Press the F5 key to confirm. Fix at the 3rd function key level opens the New.Me.Fix memory. The specific
weight, the setpoint and the tolerances are already stored.
The article description and the article number are added.

153
The input window for the setpoint value appears

To enter the designation of the memory Neutral measurement, press the F6 key Edit. Enter the designation
with the keyboard and confirm the entry by pressing the F6 key. The article number is entered in the same
way.

6.11.11 Organization data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.11.12 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in setting mode, you can adapt the Neutral Measurement application program to your
individual requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

7 Neutral measurement

Display format Decimal place Numerical input 0 to 3

Determines the number of decimal places
Factory setting: 0

Display unit 3-digit alphanumeric input

Determines the unit displayed, e.g. lit, sqm, m
Factory setting: without].

+/- tolerance separated Selection from or on

Selection on causes + and - tolerance for quantity control to be defined and queried
separately.
Selection Off means that tolerance is only queried once and is therefore equal for +
and -
Factory setting: off

154
Data record out of tolerance Selection inside or outside
Here it is specified whether a data record may be sent to the printer or EDP only
within the tolerance or also outside it. If the data record is also accepted outside
the tolerance, it is marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

Summation out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether summations into the totalizing memory may only be
made for values within the tolerance or also for values outside the tolerance.
Factory setting: Outside

Delete total before new Select from or on.

specific gravity Selection on means that the totalizing memory must first be cleared before a new
specific gravity can be determined. This prevents different types of weight from
being added together.
Factory setting: off

Totalizing or picking Select Totalize or Pick for the following settings.

Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale. Factory
setting: Totalisation

Auto totalizing / picking Select from or on.

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to
weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

7 Neutral measurement

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> Function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to

155
 allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

Fixed values Neutral Editing of fixed values Neutral measurement

measurement Selection of existing fixed values from the list
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit,
input via keyboard. Confirm the input with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.
Delete an existing fixed value
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.
Save new fixed value
Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the machine. The first number in
brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number
indicates the memory locations occupied by fixed values.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6 Confirm.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

7 Neutral measurement

Fixed value Call Selection whether the fixed value is called up via memory location number or
article number.
Factory setting: Article number

Delete neutral fixed values Select Do not execute or Execute

Execute deletes all fixed values in the New.Me.-Fix memory.

IO preassignment Select Do not execute or execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Launch mode Select from or on.

If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after
reaching the respective activated switching points. The scale can then be unloaded
without deactivating the switching point and thus starting a new process
unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F6 Start key in the
level Control functions.
Factory setting: off

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control
light, totalizing memory, organization data memory.

156
 > Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Fixed values Neutral measurement: Continuous display of the activated
specific weight memory
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value or specific value
> Volume: display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

6.12 Vehicle scale

Determining the load weight of a vehicle by calculating the difference between full and empty weighing. The
vehicle is identified, stored and recalled via the vehicle registration number. First weighing takes place
before, second weighing takes place after loading/unloading.
The higher weight corresponds to the gross weight, the lower weight corresponds to the tare weight, the
difference between the values corresponds to the net weight.

6.12.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in three levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key.

1. Vehicle weighing functions level:

First weighing Second weighing Single weighing

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Level: Tare functions, control, total

Tare Add Int. Multi Car.

Total
Fix Tare Tare Tare contr.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3. Level: Setting functions

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

157
6.12.2 Display view

Gross

Tip: For an additional display, e.g. of the vehicle registration number or the weight of the initial or single
weighing operation, you can use the F3 key to open an additional secondary display. The setting which value
is to be shown in the additional display is made in the setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display /
Additional display.

Illustration of the secondary display with number plate:

Gross

158
6.12.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / truck scale / display information field you can set which data is
displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control light, totalizing memory,
organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of organizational data memories.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight

Example Setting Display information field on Org Data + database:

Example control display, a traffic light display is available in the information field.

1. Under tolerance 2. Within tolerance 3. About tolerance

(setpoints reached exactly)

6.12.2 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

159
6.12.3 Truck scale functions

Vehicle weighing with first and second weighing

Two weighing operations are used to determine the gross (full) and tare (empty) weight of the vehicle, which
The difference corresponds to the load weight. A known empty weight of the vehicle can also be entered
manually or via the interface (EDP) for first or second weighing.
The vehicle is identified by its registration number. For the second weighing, the license plate number from
the onsite list of the first weighing is called up. You can activate automatic retrieval of the licence plate
number in setting mode. The automatic retrieval of the weighing charge or foreign material is activated in
setting mode. The identification of vehicles via barcode or card reader simplifies your processes. For more
information, please refer to Barcode Management or contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service
partner. Furthermore, there is the possibility of vehicle allocation.

Initial weighing
Call up the initial weighing by pressing the F1 or F2 key in the level Functions vehicle weighing. If the licence
plate request is activated, you can now accept the licence plate number via the keypad or via the org. data,
fixed values org. data, EDP and barcode, confirm with F6 Accept. If you do not want to enter a licence plate
number, you can accept the empty input field.
If the query "Weighing charge during initial weighing" is activated, you can now decide whether the weighing
charge should be calculated. If you press F1, F2 or F3 Yes, the window for the amount of the weighing charge
opens (for further information on the weighing charge, please refer to the section Weighing charge).
If the query "foreign content during initial weighing" is activated, the input window for the foreign content is
displayed for calculating the foreign content (for further information on the foreign content, see section
Foreign content).
The operator prompts "Drive up vehicle or enter empty weight". Let the vehicle drive onto the scale or enter a
known empty weight directly into the input field via the numeric keyboard. With the F1 Tare Fix key, you can
also access a value from the tare fix memory.
Confirm with F6 Accept, the terminal requests "Continue". When the scales are unloaded, you complete the
initial weighing, the vehicle is transferred to the onsite list with its identification and weight. The scale is
ready for weighing again.
Even if the initial weight is not accepted, the process can be terminated by pressing F5 Cancel.

Second weighing
Call the secondary weighing mode by pressing the F3 or F4 key in the level Functions vehicle weighing.
The display shows the onsite list with all vehicles (max. 50 possible) for which an initial weighing was carried
out. The oldest entry is displayed first. Select the desired vehicle with the arrow keys F3 or F4 or by entering
the consecutive number of the onsite list directly on the numeric keypad.
If the query of the weighing charge during the second weighing is activated, you can now decide whether the
weighing charge should be calculated. If you press F1, F2 or F3 Yes, the window for the amount of the
weighing charge opens (for further information on the weighing charge, please refer to the section Weighing
charge).
If the query "Foreign content during second weighing" is activated, the input window for the foreign content is
displayed for calculating the foreign content (for further information on the foreign content, see section
Foreign content).

160
> If the value of the first weighing was determined by weighing, the operator prompts "Drive up vehicle or
enter empty weight".
Let the vehicle drive onto the scale or enter a known empty weight directly into the input field via the
numeric keypad.
You can also access a value from the fixed tare memory with the F1 key. Confirm with F6 Accept.
When the weight is accepted from the scale, the operator prompts you to "Continue". When the scale is
unloaded or when you press F5 Cancel, the scale is ready to weigh again, the vehicle has been removed
from the onsite list and the data record with the weighing data has been triggered.
In the case of manual input, use the numeric keypad to enter a known empty weight directly into the input
field which opens. Confirm with F6 Accept.
After confirming, the scale is ready to weigh again, the vehicle has been removed from the onsite list and
the data record with the weighing data has been triggered.
> If the value of the initial weighing was set by manual input (PT), the operator prompts the operator to
"Drive up vehicle". A manual input for both weighing operations (first and second weighing) is not
possible. Let the vehicle drive up and confirm with F6 Accept.
The operator prompts you to "Continue". After the scales have been unloaded or cancelled with F5
Cancel, the scales are ready to weigh again, the vehicle has been removed from the onsite list and the
data record with the weighing data has been triggered.

Vehicle weighing with single weighing

To determine the load weight, the vehicle is only weighed when loaded.
The known empty weight is recorded by manual input or via the interface (EDP).
The difference corresponds to the load weight.
The identification of vehicles via barcode or card reader simplifies your processes. For more information,
please refer to Barcode Management or ask your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner. Furthermore,
there is the possibility of vehicle allocation.
You can enable automatic detection of the flag or foreign material in the setting mode.

Single weighing
Call up the single weighing mode by pressing the F5 or F6 key in the level Functions Vehicle weighing.
If the licence plate request is activated, you can now accept the licence plate number via the keypad or via the
org. data, fixed values org. data, EDP and barcode,
confirm with F6 Accept. If you do not want to enter a licence plate number, you can accept the empty input
field or, if you select Org data / Fixed values, press F5 Back.
If the query of the weighing charge for one-time weighing is activated, you can now decide whether the
weighing charge should be calculated. If you press F1, F2 or F3 Yes, the window for the amount of the
weighing charge opens (for further information on the weighing charge, please refer to the section Weighing
charge).
If the foreign content query is activated during a single weighing operation, the input window for the foreign
content is displayed for calculating the foreign content (for further information on the foreign content, please
refer to the section on foreign content).
The operator prompts you to enter the empty weight, enter it using the numeric keypad and confirm with F6
Accept. With the F1 key Tare Fix, you can also access a value from the fixed tare memory. The operator
prompts you to "Drive up the vehicle", accept the weight with F6 Accept or cancel with F5 Cancel.
When the scale is unloaded or when you press F5 Cancel, the scale is ready to weigh again and the data
record with the weighing data has been released.

161
Release Impression / data set
Various print images can be designed and functionally assigned via the service software. Specific functions
for the truck scale are:

Enter key Acquisition First weighing

The printout during initial weighing is always made after the weight value has been stored (at the end of
initial weighing), e.g. by pressing function key F6 or Enter.
Enter key Acquisition of second weighing
The printout for the second weighing is always made after the weight value has been stored (when the
second weighing is completed), for example by pressing the function key F6 or the Enter key.
Entertaste Takeover Single weighing
The printout for a single weighing operation is always made after the weight value has been stored (at the
end of the single weighing operation), for example by pressing the function key F6 or the Enter key.

The printout of a print document can also be carried out manually via the print key, provided a print image is
stored. Selection of existing print images via the quick change by printing the
and then the - key.

Print proof
For examples of print documents, see chapter 8.1 Standard print images Factory setting.
> Initial weighing Print image no. 21
> Second weighing Print image no. 22
> Single weighing Print image no. 23

The weight determined on the scales is put in angle brackets on the print document. Manual entry of the
empty weight is marked with "PT". Calculated net weight is marked with "CN".

Organizational data A to D for the documentation of suppliers, customers + address, forwarding agents,
varieties etc. can also be included in the print image.
Different print images can be stored for first, second and single weighing.
Please contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions Partner for adjustments or changes to the imprint / data
set.

Query Flag
The identification of the vehicle via the licence plate number is done with the licence plate request. This is
activated in setting mode with the setting "on".
In the various weighing sequences of initial / single weighing, the request for the query indicator is made. The
entries are then output on the printout / data record.

162
Assignment of indicator
The entry or adoption of the data for the licence plate can be assigned.
The following settings when prompted for the indicator can be specified in the setting mode:

> Number plate request window

for manual input of the number plate
> Orgdata A
Enter window OrgA for taking over the content or input via the keyboard
> Fixed values Org Data A
Selection window for the fixed value OrgA memory (max. 999 entries with 6 lines each)
> OrgData B
Selection window for taking over the content or input via the keyboard
> Fixed values Org Data B
Selection window for the fixed value OrgB memory (max. 999 entries with 6 lines each)
> Orgdata C
Selection window for taking over the content or input via the keyboard
> Fixed values Org Data C
Selection window for the fixed value OrgC memory (max. 999 entries with 6 lines each)
> OrgData D
Selection window for taking over the content or input via the keyboard
> Fixed values OrgD data D
Selection window for the fixed value OrgD memory (max. 999 entries with 6 lines each)

Query weighing charge

On request, a weighing charge can be printed on the weighing slip.
To do this, activate the query of the weighing charge in the setting mode.
The following query setting options are available:

> offFunction
weighing charge is deactivated at each weighing operation.
> Single weighing
The weighing charge function is only activated for the one-time weighing procedure.
> Single and initial weighing
The weighing charge function is activated during the one-time and initial weighing procedure.
> Single and second weighing
The weighing charge function is activated during the one-time and second weighing procedure.

If the weighing fee query is activated, you can decide in the respective process whether the weighing fee
should be calculated. The user guidance opens the query window "Calculate weighing charge?" with the
options YES or NO.

If you press the function keys F1 to F3 YES, the input window for the amount of weighing charge opens. You
can use the numeric keypad to overwrite the preset value in the input field or confirm with the F6 Accept key.
The weighing charge is confirmed on the weighing document.
If you cancel with function key F5, the weighing charge is not calculated.

If the function keys F4 to F6 NO are used, no weighing fee is charged.

163
Currency
In setting mode, a currency abbreviation can be entered alphanumerically with three digits, e.g. EUR.

Amount weighing fee

In the setting mode, you can set an amount for the proposed weighing charge.
The input for the amount is max. 999.99 and numeric. In the course of weighing, this preset amount can be
confirmed or overwritten.

Query external component

This function enables the deduction of the foreign content from the net value in the truck scale program,
for example for the deduction for moisture or refuse.
To do this, activate the query of the foreign material in setting mode.
The following query setting options are available:

> offFunction
foreign content is deactivated during each weighing operation.
> Single weighing
The foreign content function is only activated during the one-time weighing procedure
> Single and initial weighing
The minority interest function is activated during the one-time and initial weighing procedure.
> One-time and second weighing
The minority interest function is activated during the one-time and second weighing procedure.

If the query of the external share is activated, you can decide in the respective process whether an external
share calculation should be carried out. The user guidance opens the query window "Query foreign content"
by entering the value 0 and confirming with F6.

Calculation of minority interest

The proportion of the deduction from the net value and can be determined as a percentage or weight value.
The following setting options are available for calculating the foreign material in setting mode:
Percentage In the
selection, the entered percentage of the net value determined is used as the deduction value.
weight value
when selecting, the entered weight value is used as the deduction value from the calculated net value.

Deduction of minority interest

Depending on the setting, the window Query foreign content for deduction of the value appears in the
weighing procedure.

> Percent
Enter the percentage to be calculated in two digits with two decimal places, using the numeric
keypad. If you enter "0", no percentage is deducted. Press the F6 key to accept the input value or the
F5 key to cancel it.
> Enter the weight of
the portion to be deducted in the scale unit (max. value = weighing range) via the numeric keypad. If
you enter "0", no portion is deducted. Press the F6 key to accept the input value or the F5 key to
cancel it.

164
Court list
The yard list contains all vehicles (max. 50) for which a first weighing but no second weighing has been
carried out. If a vehicle is called up and used for a second weighing, it is deleted from the onsite list.
Call the onsite list with the F3 or F4 key Second weighing.
The oldest entry is displayed first. Due to space restrictions, the indicator is only displayed in abbreviated
form in the onsite list. For output to a printer or computer, the complete content entered is transmitted.
Select the desired vehicle with the arrow keys F3 or F4, then press F6 Accept after selection. Alternatively, it
is also possible to call up the list directly from the onsite list by entering the consecutive number with the
numeric keypad.
The complete list can be printed out at any time with F1 Print.
Individual entries of vehicles can be removed with F2 Delete. The complete onsite list is deleted in setting
mode under Delete onsite list with Execute.
Pressing F5 Back cancels the second weighing without deleting an entry from the onsite list.

6.12.4 Totalizing

This function is available in an adapted form in the truck scale. All gross, tare and net values which were
determined by first weighing with the second weighing or single weighing are automatically totalled.

Activate totalizing function

To use the totalizing function, the function must first be activated with "on" under totalizing function in
setting mode. After activation, all weighings are automatically totalled without any further keystroke when a
weight is stored. The totalizing memory records the gross, tare and net values after the second and single
weighing have been stored.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory.
The totalizing memory must then be cleared.

165
Summation
When the respective second and single weighing is stored, gross, tare and net weights are transferred to the
automatic totalizing memory.

Display of the current totalisation

During totalizing, the number of items, the consecutive number and the net total are displayed in the
information box if the setting "Display information box" is set to factory default. The display is interrupted if
other data must be displayed depending on the situation, e.g. organizational data or special characters
setpoints.
The display of the totals is then switched back on the next time the totals are calculated.

Hint: For the permanent display of the total in the information field set the setting in the setting mode /
program settings / truck scale / display information field to "total".

Display current totals

Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by pressing
and then press the key F4 Sum.

Return with F6.

Summation and completion

The key F6 Sum in the 2nd function key level completes the summation.
The display now shows the gross, tare and net total, as well as the transaction counter and the current
consecutive number.

166
Selection options for the display of the total
Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totalsAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.
> Display totals only
After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 Clear total key to delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the F6 Back key.

Display individual items

Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing the
and the plus key F5 in succession. The item list starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

167
Assigning and deleting the sequence number
Each entry with plus in the totalizing memory increases a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> with key Delete total
> when the terminal is switched off
> Function key "delete current number

Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. With each new
totalizing operation, the item counter is incremented by 1. The transaction counter runs up to 999, after
which an error message is displayed. The transaction counter is automatically set to zero when the total is
cleared.

6.12.5 Traffic light control

This function controls the entry and exit of the vehicles onto the scale.
The location of the traffic lights is in front and at the end or behind the truck scale.
An I/O card is required in the terminal for the traffic light connection.

Activation of the IO control for the traffic light control of the truck scale:
1. Set switching functions under Setting mode / Program settings / Truck scale / IO presetting with
"Execute".
2. Under Setting mode / Communication / IO control / IO mode, activate the switching output with "on".

Switching outputs Traffic light control

Switching point Signal traffic light / logic
S1 (inverted) Vehicle weighing reset Outbound light Active = red / n. Active = off
S2 not active
S3 Vehicle scale reset Outbound light active = green / n. Active = off
S4 not active
S5 empty message Inbound light Active = green / n. Active = red
S6 (inverted) Vehicle weighing reset Outbound light Active = red / n. Active = off

The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Procedure
When a vehicle enters, the entrance and exit are blocked. The departure traffic light is switched to green
when the weighing process is finished. When the scale is completely unloaded, the access light also turns
green and the scale is free again.
The access traffic light is controlled by the empty signal (S5), i.e. when the scale is empty, the switching
output "S5" is switched to active, accordingly a traffic light can be connected, active = green traffic light, not
active = red traffic light
The departure traffic light is controlled after confirmation of the first, second and single weighing above the
empty signal, i.e. in this condition the switching output "S3" is switched active until the scale is empty, then
the outputs "S1 and S6" become active, accordingly a traffic light can be connected, S3 active = green traffic
light, S1 and S6 active = red traffic light.

168
6.12.6 Vehicle inspection

This function can be used to check vehicles for compliance with a set weight.

Press the F5 key on the 2nd function key level, after which a vehicle can drive up to accept the setpoint or
enter the setpoint in the adjusted weight unit on the numeric keypad.
Press the F6 key to confirm. Use the numeric keypad to enter the accepted tolerance in the adjusted weight
unit or in percent. Toggling between the weight unit and the percentage with
the key.
Confirm with the F6 key Accept.

If you want to define plus and minus tolerance separately, activate in setting mode under program settings /
truck scale / +/- tolerance separately with "on".
The display of the information field switches to the display view Check, the special characters are activated.
The corresponding traffic light colour with special characters is displayed according to the actual status on
the scale for the setpoint.

Control status Traffic light colour Special characters

Below tolerance limit Yellow
Within tolerance Green
Setpoint reached exactly Green

Above tolerance limit Red

You can also have the difference to the target weight displayed in the top left-hand side of the secondary
display in figures with a + or - sign. Activate the secondary display with the F3 key Secondary display in level
3 Setting functions.

You can also display the difference to the target weight in the top left-hand side of the secondary display in
digits with a + or - sign. Activate the secondary display with the F3 key Secondary display in the Setting
functions level.
Or alternatively, the secondary display for the control light can be set in Setting mode / Terminal / Display /
Secondary display from traffic light display.

Display setpoint and tolerance

Press the key and then the F3 key. Contr.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside a defined tolerance range can be prevented or accepted. If a data record
is released outside the tolerance range, it is marked with a special character. Enable or block in setting mode
under Program settings / Truck scale / Data record out of tolerance.

Ending the vehicle check

Use the key to call up the 2nd function key level and press key F5 Drive. Then press F2 to delete with the
key Delete or press the key to delete completely.

169
6.12.7 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory).
> F3 Vehicle Contr.
Display of the current setpoint with tolerance
> F4 Total
Display of the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 Plus
Display of all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called
up with the arrow keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.12.8 Organizational data (identifier)

Customer or address data can be managed with the truck scale via the organization data (fixed values). The
application for an address field can be 35 characters with 6 lines.

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.12.9 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in the setting mode you can adapt the truck scale application program to your individual
requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

8 Truck scale

Query Flag Selection from or on

On initiates the automatic interrogation of the number plate to identify the vehicle
during initial and single weighing
Factory setting: off

Assignment of indicator Selection

> number plate
> Organizational data A
> Fixed values Org data A
> Organizational data B
> Fixed values Org data B
> org data C
> Fixed values org. data C
> org data D
> Fixed values org data D
Factory setting: Car registration number

170
8 Truck scale

Query weighing charge Selection

> off: no query
> Single-use weighing: automatic retrieval of the weighing charge for single use
> Single and initial weighing: automatic retrieval of the weighing charge for
single and initial weighing
> Single and second weighing: automatic retrieval of the weighing charge for
single weighing
Factory setting: off

Currency Input currency code three digits alphanumeric

Factory setting: [blank]}

Amount weighing fee Input amount Weighing charge numeric with 2 decimal places
The preset amount can be overwritten in the application program if desired
factory setting: 0,00

Query external component Selection

> from
> Single weighing
> Single and initial weighing
> Single and secondary weighing
Factory setting: off

Calculation of minority Selection

interest > Percent: The entered percentage is calculated as a deduction value from the
determined net value
> Weight value: The entered weight value is used as the deduction value from
the calculated net value
Factory setting: Percent

+/- tolerance separated Selection from or on

Selection on causes + and - tolerance for quantity control to be defined and queried
separately.
Selection Off means that tolerance is only queried once and is therefore equal for +
and -
Factory setting: off

Data record out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is specified whether a data record may be sent to the printer or EDP only
within the tolerance or also outside it. If the data record is also accepted outside
the tolerance, it is marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

8 Truck scale

Totalizing function Selection from or on

On activates the summation of all completed weighings.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection of the condition under which the consecutive number of the summation
should be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> Function key (activates a separate function key)

171
 Factory setting: not active

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Deleting the onsite list Selection Do not execute or Execute

Attention: Execute deletes entries of the onsite list

IO preassignment Selection Do not execute or Execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control
light, totalizing memory, organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: Display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value.
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

6.13 Dynamic switching

With the dynamic switching program, 6 outputs can be assigned switching points or preset conditions and 4
inputs for external control of scale functions.
Example: Control of weight-dependent processes such as the dosing of recipes.
To use the switching functions, an IO card (optional accessory) must be installed in the 3035 terminal.

6.13.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned in three levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key .

172
1. Level: Dynamic switching functions

Outputs Inputs Start Total Cancel Add

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Level: Tare functions, fixed values

Tare Add Int. Multi Save Switch

Fix Tare Tare Tare Fix Fix

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3. Level: Setting functions:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

6.13.2 Display view

Non-activated inputs and outputs Activated inputs and outputs

Gross Gross

Tip: For an additional display of, for example, the tare value or the X10 display, you can press the F3 key to
open an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the additional display is
made in Setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Additional display.

173
Figure: Secondary display with tare value:

Net

6.13.3 Display of information field

In setting mode / program settings / dynamic switching / display information field, you can set which data is
displayed in the information field.

The following options are available:

> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. IO control, totalizing memory,
organization data memory.
> IO control: Status of the switching outputs and inputs
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data memories.
> Fixed values dyn. switching: Continuous display of the activated memory from dynamic switching.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight

Example Setting Display information field to fixed values dynamic switching:

174
6.13.4 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

6.13.5 Activating IO control

First of all, for the Dynamic switching application and the use of the IO module, the function (operating mode)
must be activated.

Selection of IO operating modes

> Off
> On
> On, safety function
In case of power failure with release of the switching outputs

Activation of inputs and outputs

The desired selection can be set in Setting mode / Communication / IO control / IO mode. For more details,
see chapter 7.11.1 Selecting IO operating modes.

After activating the inputs and outputs, the IO module can receive or transmit switching signals.

6.13.6 Dynamic switching functions

Assign outputs
You can assign setpoints (switching points) or preset conditions (such as empty signal, standstill, underload,
overload) to up to 6 outputs.
If the setpoint is reached by loading or unloading the scale or if the specified condition occurs, the output is
activated or deactivated depending on the setting.
The settings of the switching points are valid for all connected scales (measuring points), i.e. they retain their
validity or function when changing measuring points.

In the program settings for dynamic switching, further conditions can be selected for setpoints (weight
values):
Setpoint comparison with the current measured value (factory setting) or totalizing memory.
Activation of switching point continuously (factory setting) or at stability of the scale.

In the level Functions Dynamic switching, press the F1 key Outputs.

A list of the 6 outputs S1 to S6 with the current setting functions is displayed.

175
You can move through the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. F6 Edit calls up the marked switching point.

Set output function

1.
Select the switching condition
with the arrow keys F3 and F4 and confirm with F6

2. Switch-on delay
Enter the delay value with the keypad, value 0 or blank = no delay,
then confirm with F6

3. Select polarity
with the arrow keys F3 and F4 and confirm with F6

4. Interlock
Mark the selection with the arrow keys F3 and F4 and confirm with F6

5. Gross/net (function only with switching condition setpoint)

Mark selection with the arrow keys F3 and F4 and accept with F6

6. Switching point (function only with switching condition setpoint)

Enter weight value via the keypad, if another unit is required, switch to the 2nd unit (e.g. change from
kg to g) by pressing the key , then confirm with F6

In the menu window the switching point with the new active condition is displayed:
Switching delay timer (T), polarity inverted (I), locking (V) and net (N), additionally the switching point of the
weight value is always displayed.

176
Repeat the procedure for all other switching points to be assigned. When you have assigned all desired
switching points, activate your entries with the F1 key Activate.
The F5 Cancel key exits the input without saving any changes.
For further details, see chapter 7.11.2 Outputs.

The display switches to the weighing mode. After the connected scale is loaded, the outputs are displayed in
the information field.
If a switching point is triggered by reaching the setpoint or by the occurrence of the specified condition, it is
darkened in the display as long as the event lasts.
By a summation procedure or by calling up the organization data memory, the display of the switching points
in the information field is interrupted until the scale is unloaded again.

Delete outputs
In the level Functions Dynamic switching, press the F1 key Outputs.
A list of the 6 outputs with the activated switching points is displayed.
You can now delete all conditions with the F2 Delete or - key.
The deletion becomes effective immediately and the display returns to the weighing mode.

Assign inputs
You can freely assign functions to 4 inputs. With these functions it is possible to control the scale / terminal
from outside.
The settings of the inputs are valid for all connected scales (measuring points), i.e. they retain their validity or
function when changing measuring points.

In the Dynamic switching functions level, press the F2 inputs key.

A list of the 4 inputs E1 to E4 with the current setting functions is displayed.

You can move through the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. F6 Edit calls up the marked switching point.

177
Set input function

1. Input function
Mark the selection with the arrow keys F3 and F4 and confirm with F6

2. Signal edge
Mark selection with the arrow keys F3 and F4 and confirm with F6

In the menu window, the input is displayed with the new active condition:
rising from "Low" to "High" (LH) or falling from "High" to "Low" (HL) and with the function description.

Repeat the procedure for all other inputs to be assigned. When you have assigned all desired inputs, activate
your entries with the F1 key Activate.
Press the F5 Cancel key to quit the input without saving any changes.
For further details, see chapter 7.11.3 Inputs.

The display switches to the weighing mode. The status for the level of the inputs is shown in the information
field, occupied inputs are highlighted dark with inverted light.
A totalizing process or the call of the organization data memory interrupts the display of the inputs in the
information field until the scale is unloaded again.

Delete inputs
In the Dynamic switching functions level, press the F2 inputs key.
A list of the 4 inputs with the activated functions is displayed.
You can now delete all conditions with the F2 Delete or - key.
The deletion becomes effective immediately and the display returns to the weighing mode.

178
Fixed values Dynamic switching (Switch Fix)
You can store up to 999 specific weights in a power-failure-proof memory.
Each memory location has the following entries:
> Three-digit serial number
> Description (alphanumeric max. 18 characters)
> Article number (alphanumeric max. 18 digits)
> Switching point S1 (switching condition, timer, polarity, interlock, possibly type and value of weight)
> Switching point S2 (switching condition, timer, polarity, interlock, possibly type and value of weight)
> Switching point S3 (switching condition, timer, polarity, interlock, possibly type and value of weight)
> Switching point S4 (switching condition, timer, polarity, interlock, possibly type and value of weight)
> Switching point S5 (switching condition, timer, polarity, interlock, possibly type and value of weight)
> Switching point S6 (switching condition, timer, polarity, interlock, possibly type and value of weight)
> Input E1 (function, signal edge)
> Input E2 (function, signal edge)
> Input E3 (function, signal edge)
> Input E4 (function, signal edge)

a) Call up the switch fix memory to edit the fixed values:

Press key and then F4 Switch Fix

Selection of existing fixed values from the list

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached, accept the desired fixed
value with F6 Edit.
Direct access via article number or memory location number. Enter the article number or memory location
number with the numeric keypad. Whether to call the item number or memory location number is specified in
the setting mode. Enter the article number as a search criterion left-justified and the memory location
number as a search criterion right-justified. Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.

Edit an existing fixed value from the list

Edit the selected fixed value with F6 Edit.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Accept the input with F6 (Cancel
without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are edited in the same way.

Delete an existing fixed value

Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4 or call via the article number or the consecutive number.
Delete the called fixed value with F2 Delete. Answer the security question with YES.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.

Save new fixed value

Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the terminal. The first number in brackets indicates the number
of free memory locations, the second number indicates the occupied memory locations.
Parameter Name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via the keyboard. Accept the input with F6 (cancel
without accepting the input with F5 Cancel).
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

b) Calling the list of fixed values Dyn. switching to use the fixed values
In level 2, press the tare functions, fixed values key F6 Switch Fixed.
The display shows the last fixed value called up

179
Selection within the list
> Scroll with the arrow keys F3 or F4 until the desired memory location is reached,
accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept
> Direct access via article number or memory location numberEnter
the article or memory location number with the numeric keypad.
(Determine whether the article number or memory location number is called up in setting mode, enter
the article number as search criterion left-justified, enter the memory location number as search
criterion right-justified) Accept the desired fixed value with F6 Accept

When the fixed value is called, the output and input functions are taken over.
Delete the saved switching functions as described under Deleting outputs and inputs.

Note
If the "Display bar code" function is enabled and a fixed value memory that is not in the fixed memory is
recalled, the error message "Error 83 - Fixed value not available" is displayed. You are returned to the
weighing mode and the selected function is deleted.

Launch mode
If the start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after reaching the respective
defined switching point (S1 to S6). The scale can then be unloaded without deactivating the switching point
and thus starting a new process unintentionally. The frozen state (HLD) is only released by pressing the key
F3 Start in level dynamic switching.
Activate the start mode in the setting mode under Program settings / Dynamic switching / Start mode.

6.13.7 Totalizing and picking

This function is also available in dynamic switching.

With this function, items can be totaled/picked.
The totalizing functions are controlled with function keys on the Functions level Dynamic switching.

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other, the weight in the totalizing memory is added
and the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale.
The weight is added in the total memory and the scale returns to zero without unloading.
It is not allowed to change measuring points during the picking process.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings.
The selection applies to all connected weighbridges.
The following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory.
The totalizing memory must then be cleared.

180
Operation of the totalizing functions
Use the function change key to call up the totalizing functions level

Plus F6
By pressing the F6 Plus key, the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are increased by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in the setting
mode.
A weight value with 0 or summation without unload is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight" (with unload
factor = 0 only a weight change is necessary).
Gross, tare and net weights are added together.

Cancellation F5
Individual items can be cancelled or weighed back with the F5 Cancel key.
After pressing the cancel key, you are prompted either to load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the
consecutive number of the weight to be cancelled.
You can obtain information on the consecutive number in advance by using the key combination and F5
Plus.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled and confirm with F6
Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, the weight value is taken from the scale when key F6 is pressed. If the
scale is not loaded, error message Error 46 is displayed.
Cancellation or backweighing is indicated in the print document by the designation cancellation.
The consecutive number is incremented by one and the item counter is decremented by one.
If the item counter is at 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by error message Error 48.

Total F4 or with the CL key

Press the F4 Total key to complete the totalizing operation.
The display now shows the gross, tare and net total, as well as the transaction counter and consecutive
number of the last operation.

Selection options for displaying the total

Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totals

After pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the
memory are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.
> Display of totals only
After pressing the function key Total, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Delete total to delete the total memory, followed by the confirmation prompt Delete
total? Pressing the keys F1 to F3 YES to delete the totalizing memory, while pressing the keys F34 to
F6 NO does not delete the totalizing memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the key F6 Back.

Relief factor for summation

(Parameter is not used in the picking function)
In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
time you place each item on the scale in the totalizing function. If the scale is not unloaded, the weight value
is not saved in the totalizing memory and is displayed with the error message Error 55 Place weight on scale.
This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

181
Auto-Summing
In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.
Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
taken over into the totalizing memory after unloading (only for totalizing) and placing on weight and after
standstill.
If the autototalizing function is interrupted by a cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
autototalizing must be restarted with the Plus key.
Info: Like manual totalizing, auto totalizing can be defined as a condition that triggers printing (see chapter
on printing).
During auto-picking, a load < 5 digits is not automatically stored, but weights < 5 digits can be manually
stored in the picking memory by pressing the F6 Plus key.

Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, cancellation) in the totalizing memory is assigned a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> Clearing the totalizing memory
> Switching off the terminal
> Function key: F1 delete current number when called up with the keys and F4 total.

Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new
transaction with plus or automatic totalizing, the transaction counter is incremented by 1. The transaction
counter runs up to 999, after which the error message Error 45 appears. If the transaction is cancelled, the
transaction counter is reduced by 1.
The transaction counter is automatically set to zero each time the total is cleared.

Print triggering keys

Additional keys or functions such as Plus, Cancel and Total can be used with the Totalizing / Picking function
as print-triggering keys, e.g. for printing a document. A prerequisite is that a print image has been stored for
the respective key. In setting mode, you must set the totalizing key function to "Display, print and delete" or
delete the total with the F2 key.

Display current totals

Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by successively pressing and then press
the key F5 Sum. You can delete the totals with the F2 key and the consecutive number (if only "Display" is
activated in setting mode under the function "Total key") or return to the totalizing mode with the F6 Back
key.
Display Current Totals view:

182
Info: Display information field with current totals
In setting mode / program settings / dynamic switching / display information field, the total can be set, then
the total is always displayed in the information field.

Display individual items

Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing
the and the F6 Plus key in succession. The list of items starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Info: Display information field with item list

In the setting mode / program settings / dynamic switching / display information field the last item can be
set, then the last item is always displayed in the information field.

6.13.8 Display option with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 IO ports
Display of the current input and output assignment (IO ports)
> F3 Tare Fix
Display of the stored tare fixed values (Tare-Fix memory)
> F4 Switch fixDisplay of
the stored fixed values dynamic switching (switch fix memory)
> F5 SumDisplays
the current totals in the totalizing memory
> F6 PlusDisplays
all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called up with the
arrow keys (F3/F4).
> tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

183
6.13.9 Transferring current values into the fixed memory

For direct transfer of output and input functions (IO port) to the fixed memory, first enter the output and input
functions.

Gross

Press the F5 key to confirm. Fixed at the 2nd function key level opens the display of the current assignment
of IO ports. The switching conditions of the outputs and the input assignment are already accepted. The
article description and the article number are added.

The input window for the IO ports appears.

The designation of the setpoint is entered by pressing the F6 Edit key. Enter the designation with the
keyboard and confirm your entry by pressing the F6 key.
The article number is entered in the same way.

184
6.13.10 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.13.11 Settings in the setting mode

With the parameters in setting mode, you can adapt the Dynamic switching application program to your
individual requirements. To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions
level and then press F6 Accept to call up program settings. F6 Next calls up the program settings for the
selected application program

9 Dynamic switching

Setpoint comparison Selection

With current measured value
With totalizing memory
Factory setting: With current measured value

Activation switching point Selection

ongoing
at stability of the scale
Factory setting: running

Totalizing or picking Select Totalize or Pick for the following settings.

Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale. Factory
setting: Totalisation

Auto totalizing / picking Select from or on.

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to
weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure can be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

185
9 Dynamic switching

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to
allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

Fixed values dynamic Editing fixed values dynamic switching

switching Selection of existing fixed values from the list
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Call the desired fixed value with F6 Edit.
Edit an existing fixed value from the list
Press F6 to edit the marked fixed value.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit,
input via keyboard. Confirm the input with F6.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.
Delete an existing fixed value
Scroll with the arrow keys F3 and F4.
Delete the marked fixed value with F2 Delete.
The resulting gap in the consecutive numbering is closed.
Save new fixed value
Press F1 New.
The memory location number is assigned by the machine. The first number in
brackets indicates the number of free memory locations, the second number
indicates the memory locations occupied by fixed values.
Parameter name is highlighted, call up with F6 Edit, input via keyboard. Confirm the
entry with F6 Confirm.
(Cancel without accepting the input with F5 Cancel.)
Other parameters are processed in the same way.

Exit the list of fixed values

Press the F5 Back key to exit the list.

Fixed value Call Selection whether the fixed value is called up via memory location number or
article number.
Factory setting: Article number

Deleting fixed switching Select Do not execute or Execute

values Execute deletes all fixed values Neutral measurement.

Start Mode Select from or on.

If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after
reaching the respective activated switching points (S1 to S8). The scale can then
be unloaded without deactivating the switching point and thus starting a new
process unintentionally. Only by pressing the key F3 Start in 1st level dynamic
switching the frozen state is released.
Factory setting: off

186
 9 Dynamic switching

Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. IO control,
totalizing memory, organization data memory.
> IO control: Continuous display of the output and input symbols.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Fixed values dyn. switching: Continuous display of the activated read-only
memory Dyn. switching
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: Display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value.
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute selection resets all settings to factory defaults

6.14 Weighing in percent

When weighing in percent, a percentage is assigned to a weight value.

This allows the percentage of the weighed product to be displayed as a percentage of the reference weight.
The scale then shows a percentage instead of the weight value.
Example: Display of percentage deviations from the target weight for castings.

6.14.1 Function keys

The function keys F1 to F6 are available to control the functions. These are assigned to four levels, and you
can switch between the levels by pressing the function change key .

1. Level: Percentage functions

Perc. Perc. Del.

Total Cancel Add
100 Variab Perc.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

2. Level: Control functions

Perc.
Start
contr.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

187
3. Level: Tare functions

Tare Add Int. Multi

Fix Tare Tare Tare

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

4. Level: Setting functions

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross x10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

6.14.2 Display view

Tip: For an additional display, e.g. of the current weight or the tare weight, you can press the F3 key to open
an additional secondary display. The setting which value is to be shown in the secondary display is made in
setting mode under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Figure: Secondary display with current weight

Net

188
6.14.3 Display information field

In the setting mode / program settings / weighing in percent / display information field you can set which
data are displayed in the information field.
The following options are available:
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control light, totalizing memory,
organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data memories.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: display Barcode128 with the current stability weight or percentage
> Volume: display volume only after activating the volume measurement function

Example Setting Information field display to total:

Example control display, a traffic light display is available in the information field.

1. Under tolerance 2. Within tolerance 3. About tolerance

(setpoints reached exactly)

6.14.3 Tare function

The description and detailed instructions for the tare function can be found in chapter 6.5.

189
6.14.4 Functions Weighing in Percent

For the application weighing in percent the number of decimal places for the display weighing in percent
must be determined, factory setting is no decimal place.
The setting for this is made in setting mode under Program settings / Weighing in percent / Display format
decimal place.

The determination of the reference weight is possible via the following function keys in level 1:

> Function key F1 Proz 100Determination of

the reference weight value for 100%.
Place the reference part on the scale, press the key F 1 Percent 100.
The terminal has determined the reference weight and displays 100%.
Further material placed on the scale is displayed continuously as a percentage value in relation to the
reference part.

> Function key F2 Ref VariabDetermination of

the reference weight with freely selected percentage.
Place the reference part on the scale, press the F2 Percent Variab key and enter the percentage (1 to
9999%) of the reference part placed on the scale in relation to the setpoint using the numeric keypad.
Confirm your entry with F6 Accept.
The scale has accepted the reference weight and displays the entered percentage value. Any further
material placed on the scale is displayed continuously as a percentage value in relation to the
reference part.

> Delete function key F3 PercentPressing

the function key F3 Delete Percent or key deletes the current reference weight, the scale ends the
function Weighing in Percent and returns to the weight display.

Weight display during percentage weighing

For an additional display, the current weight can be shown in the 4th level function keys in the top left-hand
corner of the display by pressing F3.
The setting of which value is to be shown in the secondary display is made in the setting mode under Setting
mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Percentage weighing with several weighbridges

If several scales are connected, the reference weight for percentage weighing can be determined on each
scale. For best results it is recommended to determine the reference weight on the scale with the finest
numerical increment.
Select the scale with the key .
Once the reference weight has been determined, it is possible to switch to a higher capacity bulk scale in
order to be able to precisely check even large quantities with the percentage determined on the reference
scale.

190
6.14.5 Totalizing and picking

This function is also available in weighing in percent.

This function can be used to totalize/pick weighed parts.
The totalizing functions are controlled with function keys on the Percent functions level.

Totalize
means that the individual items are weighed one after the other, the weight in the totalizing memory is added
and the scale is unloaded after each individual weighing.

Picking
means that the weighed positions remain on the scale.
The weight is added in the total memory and the scale returns to zero without unloading.
It is not allowed to change measuring points during the picking process.

The selection Totalize or Pick

is made in the setting mode Program settings.
The selection applies to all connected weighbridges.
The following only refers to totalizing as an example.

Totalizing memory for several connected scales

A central totalizing memory is maintained for all connected scales.

Total memory capacity

A maximum of 999 bookings can be made in the totalizing memory.
The totalizing memory must then be cleared.

Display view
After the first totalizing, the display changes from the basic Org Data view to the Totalizing view if the setting
"Display information field" is set to factory default.

191
Operation of the totalizing functions
Use the function change key to call up the Percent functions level.

> Plus F6
By pressing the Plus key the weight on the weighbridge is transferred to the totalizing memory. The
transaction counter and the consecutive number are incremented by 1.
Before totalizing again, the scale must be unloaded at least up to the unload factor defined in setting
mode.
A weight value with 0 or totalization without unload is displayed with "Error 55 Apply weight". With
unload factor = 0 only one weight change is necessary.
Gross, tare and net weights as well as the percentage values are added to the quantity total.

> Cancel F5
You can cancel or reweigh individual items with the cancel key. After pressing the cancel key, you are
prompted to either load the weight to be cancelled or to enter the consecutive number of the weight
to be cancelled.
For information on the consecutive number, use the key combination Info and plus F5.
enter the consecutive number of the item to be cancelled using the numeric keypad and confirm with
F6 Accept.
If no consecutive number is entered, pressing F6 will cause the weight value to be taken from the
scale. If the scale is not loaded, an error message Error 46 is displayed. Cancellation or backweighing
is indicated in the print document by the designation Cancellation. The consecutive number is
incremented by one and the transaction counter is decremented by one.
If the transaction counter is set to 0, no further cancellation is possible, indicated by error message
Error 48.

> Total F4 or with the CL key

The Total key completes the totalizing process.
The display now shows the gross, tare, net and piece totals, as well as the transaction counter and
consecutive number of the last operation.

Selection options for displaying the total

Clearing the totalizing memory
The following functions can be assigned to the Total function key in Setting mode:

> Display, print and delete totalsAfter

pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds, the contents of the memory
are printed and deleted at the same time. You can then start a new totalizing procedure.
> Display totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the user can decide whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 Clear total key to delete the total memory.
If you want to continue totalizing without deleting the memory, press the F6 Back key.

Relief factor for summation

(Cannot be activated during picking)
In setting mode, you can specify that the scale must be unloaded by a certain number of digits between the
placement of each item on the scale
. This prevents, for example, double storage of an item.

192
Auto-Summing
In setting mode, the Auto Sum function can be activated.
Then only the first position has to be taken over with the plus key, all further positions are automatically
loaded according to weight and stability are stored in the totalizing memory.
As long as Auto-Summing is active, the plus key is dimmed.
If the auto-summing is interrupted by cancellation, error message or change of measuring point,
then Auto-Summing must be started again with the Plus key.
Info: Auto-summing can be defined as a print triggering condition just like manual summing
(see chapter 8 Printing).

Assigning and deleting the sequence number

Each entry (plus, hand, cancellation) in the totalizing memory increases a four-digit consecutive number.
The sequence number is not reset in the factory setting.
Optionally, you can specify in setting mode to reset the sequence number:
> not active (no reset = factory setting)
> with key Delete total
> when the terminal is switched off
> Function key "delete current number

Item counter
The transaction counter only counts the transactions that have actually been totalled. For each new
operation with plus, manual or automatic totalizing, the item counter is incremented by 1. The transaction
counter runs up to 999, after which an error message is displayed. If the transaction is cancelled, the
transaction counter is reduced by 1.
The transaction counter is automatically set to zero when the total is cleared.

Print triggering keys

The Plus, Cancellation and Total keys can trigger a document printout.
A prerequisite is that a print image has been saved for the relevant key.
For the totalizing key, the option "Display, print
and delete" must be selected.

Display current totals

Within a summation, you can display the total values reached by successively pressing
and then press the key F4 Total
You can delete the totals with key F2 Total and delete the key F1 for the current number F1 (if activated in
setting mode) or return to the totalizing function with key F6.

193
Display individual items
Within a totalizing function, you can call up the individual items from the totalizing memory by pressing
the - and the plus key F5 in succession. The item list starts with the most recent entry.
Cycle through the list with the arrow keys F3 (older entries) and F4 (newer entries).
The last 50 entries can be called up.
Press the F5 Back key to exit the display of the individual items and return to the previous display.

Totalizing outside tolerance

The accumulation of quantities that are outside a specified tolerance range can be prevented. If the quantity
is outside the tolerance, the error message "Out of tolerance" is displayed after pressing the Plus key.
To do this, you must switch off in setting mode under "Totalizing out of tolerance".
You specify the target quantity and the allowed tolerance in the Percent Control mode.
For more information see percentage control

6.14.6 Percentage control

With the percentage control function, weights / parts can be dosed into a container with tolerance control or
quantities can be checked.

To call up the percentage control function, you must already have assigned a reference weight to a
percentage, therefore the display shows the unit %.
In level 2 Control functions, press the key F5 Percent contrast.
Enter the desired setpoint in percent with the numeric keypad and confirm with F6 Accept. Use the numeric
keypad to enter the accepted tolerance in percent and confirm with the F6 key.

If you want to define plus and minus tolerance separately, activate in the setting mode under program
settings / percentage weighing / +/- tolerance separately / on.
The display shows the traffic light function with the special characters in the display view, provided that the
factory setting or traffic light function is activated in the info field.
The corresponding traffic light colour with special characters is displayed according to the actual status on
the scale for the setpoint value.

194
 Control status Traffic light colour Special characters
Below tolerance limit Yellow
Within tolerance Green
Setpoint reached exactly Green

Above tolerance limit Red

You can also have the difference to the target weight displayed in the top left-hand side of the secondary
display in figures with a + or - sign. Activate the secondary display with the F3 key Secondary display in level
4 Setting functions.

Display setpoint and tolerance

Press the Info key and then the F3 Percent Contrast key.

Dataset/printing within or outside tolerance

The release of a data record outside a defined tolerance range can be prevented or accepted. If a data record
is released outside the tolerance range, it is marked with a special character. Enable or block in setting mode
under Program settings / Weighing in percent / Data record out of tolerance.

Switching points during control

If you want to transmit the control values via the interface, e.g. to a control traffic light or a controller, an I/O
card must be installed in the terminal. This must be activated in the setting mode under Program settings /
Weighing in percent / IO Pre-assignment must be activated with Execute. The output signals are assigned as
follows:

Switching point Signal

S1 Weight over tolerance
S2 Not active
S3 Weight within tolerance
S4 Weight under tolerance
S5 Empty message
S6 Weight over tolerance
The individual inputs and outputs can be adjusted individually.

Launch mode
If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after reaching the respective
activated switching points. The scale can then be unloaded without deactivating the switching point and thus
starting a new process unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F6 Start key in the
level Control functions.
Activate the start mode in the setting mode under program settings / percentage weighing / start mode.

Stop checking
Press the key to call up the 2nd level of control functions and press key F5 Quantities Contr., then delete
with key F2 Delete or complete deletion with key .

195
6.14.7 Display options with the Info key

Pressing the key gives you the following choice:

> F1 Tare Fix

Display of the stored tare fixed values (tare fix memory)
> F3 Perc. contr.
Display of the current setpoint with tolerance
> F4 Total
Display of the totals in the totalizing memory
> F5 Plus
Displays all the stored items in the totalizing memory (item list). The individual items can be called up
with the arrow keys (F3/F4).
> Tare key
Display of the current tare weight in the tare memory.
After pressing the key , press the key .

6.14.8 Organizational data (identifier)

Detailed information on the organizational data can be found in chapter 5.11.

6.14.9 Settings in Setting Mode

With the parameters in the setting mode you can adapt the weighing in percent application program to your
individual requirements.
To call up the setting mode, press the F6 Setting mode key on the Setting functions level and then press F6
Accept to call up program settings.
F6 Next calls up the program settings for the selected application program

10 Percentage weighing

Display format Decimal Input 0 to 3

places Determines the number of decimal places for the percentage display
Factory setting: 0

+/- tolerance separated Selection from or on

Selection on means that + and - tolerance for the control can be defined and
queried separately.
Selection Off means that tolerance is only queried once and is therefore equal for +
and -
Factory setting: off

Data record out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is specified whether a data record may be sent to the printer or EDP only
within the tolerance or also outside it. If the data record is also accepted outside
the tolerance, it is marked with a special character.
Factory setting: Outside

Summation out of tolerance Selection inside or outside

Here it is defined whether summations into the totalizing memory may only be
made for values within the tolerance or also for values outside the tolerance.
Factory setting: Outside

196
Totalizing or picking Select Totalize or Pick for the following settings.
Totalizing means that the individual positions are taken from the scale after being
transferred to the totalizing memory.
Picking means that the individual items remain on the scale after being transferred
to the totalizing memory and the next items are placed on the scale. Factory
setting: Totalisation

Auto totalizing / picking Select from or on.

On means that only the first position must be stored by pressing the Plus key, all
other positions are automatically stored in the totalizing memory according to
weight and stability.
Factory setting: off

running time No. Reset Selection under which condition the consecutive number of the totalisation /
picking is to be reset
> not active
> Clear total memory
> Switch off
> function key (activates a separate function key)
Factory setting: not active

10 Percentage weighing

Sum key function Selection of which functions are to be linked to the summary key
Displaying totals onlyAfter
pressing the Total function key, the total is displayed. The user can then decide
whether to clear the totalizing memory.
Press the F2 key Clear total to clear the total memory.
Then confirm the security prompt with the F1 to F3 keys with YES, and the total is
printed.
Display/Print/Clear total After
pressing the Total function key, the totals are displayed for 3 seconds
, the memory contents are printed and simultaneously cleared. Afterwards,
a new totalizing procedure
can
be started.
Factory setting: Display/Print/Clear

Relief factor Input in d via numeric keypad

The number of digit steps by which the scale must be unloaded during totalizing to
allow further weight storage in the totalizing memory. If the weight is not unloaded
the weight value is not stored in the totalizing memory, error message "Error 55
Place weight on scale".
Between 0 and 30 digit steps can be specified. At 0, you can totalise, provided that
the standstill was once gone.
Factory setting: 15 digit steps

IO preassignment Select Do not execute or execute

Execute activates the switching functions for an external indicator light or control.
An I/O card must be installed to control the switching operations.

Launch mode Select from or on.

If start mode is activated, the scale freezes the value and thus the signal after
reaching the respective activated switching points. The scale can then be unloaded
without deactivating the switching point and thus starting a new process
unintentionally. The frozen state is only released by pressing the F6 Start key in the
level Control functions.
Factory setting: off

197
Display information field Select which data should be displayed in the information field
> Factory setting: Change between the individual functions used, e.g. control
light, totalizing memory, organization data memory.
> Control display: Continuous display of the traffic light function.
> Total: Continuous display of the totalizing memory.
> Last item: Continuous display of the last item.
> Organizational data + database: Continuous display of the organizational data
memories.
> Barcode content: Continuous display of the scanned barcode.
> Code128 Weight value: Display Barcode128 with the current stability weight
value or percentage.
> Volume: display volume only after activating the volume measurement
function
Factory setting: Factory setting

Factory setting Execute Selection resets all settings to factory default.

198
7. Communication

7.1 Alibi memory

The 3035 terminal has an integrated calibratable alibi memory solution for 4 million entries. The storage
medium is the optional Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card (high-quality SLC memory card),

When using an alibi memory, you may store data from calibrated systems in accordance with the following
conditions in your PC and use it in business transactions:

If a weighing instrument is used for legal-for-trade purposes, an unverified PC may only be used for further
processing of the measured values if
> the scales or an additional device belonging to the scales (alibi memory) records or stores the
measured values unchanged and indelibly
> these values are available to both parties affected by the measurement.
The user must ensure that calibrated measured values can be recorded at any time.
In these cases, the following imprint must be permanently and analogously applied to the business
documents intended for the customer:
Measured values from freely programmable additional equipment. The calibrated measured values can be
viewed.

7.1.1 Activating the alibi memory

The alibi memory is activated in the service area.

Please contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner.
When Alibi memory is activated, the icon in the toolbar is enabled.
The symbol also indicates the fill level of the alibi memory.

To be able to save data records in the alibi memory, the following requirements must be met:
> Alibi memory must be activated
> Using the interface EDV:
(setting mode menu Communication with the respective interface using EDV)
> Print image "EDP in Alibi memory" must be on the print key
(key combination INFO / print key Print image no. 7 Transfer EDP to Alibi memory)

The print image "EDV in Alibi memory" is the default print image in the factory delivery of your
Terminal 3035 already included.
Your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner can make individual adjustments to the print image for you.

EDP in alibi memory Alibi identification | scale status | scale no. | net weight value
Print trigger: Push key
A0000123 | 0010 | 01 | N 1.235 kg

199
7.1.2 Read alibi memory

Call the function level Setting functions with the function change key:

Level setting functions:

Aux. Prog- Setup

Gross X 10
display ram mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F6 Set up mode key.

Use the arrow keys to select the Communication menu and press F6 Next to enter the menu.
Select the Alibi memory submenu, call it up with F6 Next.

Memory size
Display of capacity 4,000,000 = 100 % (maximum number of entries that can be stored)
If the capacity limit is reached, the error message Error 36 Write alibi not possible appears. In this case the
complete contents of the alibi memory must be deleted or the alibi memory card must be replaced. A data
backup for the period of time that can be proven in accordance with calibration law should be carried out
before the alibi memory is deleted using the search function (several entries).

Fill level
Display of the number of entries and percentage fill level

Search (single entry)

When called up with F6, the sequence number of the most recent available entry is displayed. The sequence
number can be overwritten with the number of the desired entry.
Key F6 Apply calls the entry.

The entry has the following form:

A consecutive number of the entry Scale type/serial number Measuring point number
Gross weightTare weight

Example:
A0000123 2813/04-0002 01
AG 150 g AT 25 g

Key F1 initiates a single print, key F5 returns to the Alibi memory menu.
For data output single print F1, the use of the interface must be set to EDP 2 (unidirectional).

200
Search function (multiple entries)
Calling up several consecutive entries, which are limited by entering the most recent and the oldest desired
consecutive number. When you press F6, the sequence number of the most recent entry available is
displayed. The sequence number can be overwritten with the number of the desired most recent entry,
confirm with F6.
The sequence number of the oldest available entry is displayed.
The sequence number can be overwritten with the number of the oldest entry you wish to have, confirm with
F6.

The display now shows the most recently selected entry, scroll to the other entries with the arrow keys F3
(older entry) and F4 (younger entry).
Key F1 initiates a single print, key F2 prints all selected entries, key F5 returns to the Alibi Memory menu. For
data output Single print F1 and All print F2, the use of the interface must be set to EDP 2 (unidirectional).

7.1.3 Search for additional field in alibi memory

In this menu item a single entry can be searched for using the additional field.
The search function starts with the sequence from the "Most recent alibi entry" to the "Oldest alibi entry" and
after the search entry from left to right. The first matching search entry is displayed, identical contents in the
additional field should be avoided. When searching for the date the search is done by day.month and year
(##.##.####), then by time with hours, minutes and seconds (##:##:##). By separating the colon character,
a time search can be performed only from an external keyboard.

7.1.4 Extended additional field in the alibi memory

The additional field in the alibi memory has 35 characters like the ORG data. With the barcode memory (with
a maximum of 61 characters), the content is truncated after the 35th character or date / time.

Display in alibi memory:

Alibi memory

Single Print
print all Back

The additional field is displayed left-justified directly below the gross and tare value. The print output looks
as follows:
A0000170 2889/15-9998 01
AG 0.309 kg AT 0.000 kg
12345678901234567890123456789012345

201
Data transfer additional field
The setting for the data link with the alibi memory is made in Setting mode / Communication / Alibi memory.

Use the arrow key F4 Select Use additional field, F6 Continue.

In the menu window "Use additional field", the respective selection is defined.

Use the arrow keys F3 and F4 to mark the use of the additional field, F6 Accept.

The following functions are available:

> None (without addition of the additional field in the alibi memory)
> Barcode (addition of the current value from the barcode memory)
> Orgdata A (addition of the current content from org data memory A)
> Orgdata B (addition of the current content from the org data memory B)
> Orgdata C (addition of the current content from the org data memory C)
> Orgdata D (addition of the current content from the org data memory D)
> Date/time (addition of the current date/time from terminal 3035)
> Price labelling (only special software price labelling)

7.1.5 Delete, disable or replace the alibi memory

Deletion, deactivation or replacement of the alibi memory is carried out in the service area.
Please contact your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner.

202
7.2 Interface 1 RS 232 (internal)

The hardware of the interface 1 RS232 (internal) is fitted on the central board. Depending on the variant of
the terminal, the interface is led to the outside via a 5-pin socket.
Depending on how the interface is used, a special connection cable is required. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer or a Soehnle Industrial Solutions contact person.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Interface 1 to mark RS232 (internal), F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all parameters of the interface is 1 RS232 (internal):

Use interface:
> none (no use and interface is disabled)
> 2795.14 (Soehnle Professional strip printer / printer output 1)
> 2795.12 + 2795.20 (Soehnle Professional label printer / printer output 2)
> EDP bidirectional function (terminal can send and receive data / EDP output)
> EDP2 unidirectional function (terminal can only send data, not receive /
EDP output uni)
> Barcode for scanner connection (data reception for barcode processing/ storage)
> Second/large display (For use with Soehnle Professional Second/large displays)
> Digital scale (connection and adjustment according to the adjustment instructions 470.702.110)
If another interface is used for one of the functions, the corresponding function is blocked for all other
interfaces and is displayed like this.
Factory setting: EDP (for variant 3035.01.001 with interface 1)

Baud rate:
> 1200
> 2400
> 4800
> 9600
> 19200
> 38400
Factory setting: 9600

Data bits
> 7
> 8
Factory setting: 8

Parity
> none
> even
> odd
Factory setting: none

Xon / Xoff
> from
> a
Factory setting: off

203
Factory setting
> Do not execute
> Execute
Execute resets all individual settings in this parameter area to the factory setting.

For more information on all interfaces, refer to the separate interface description 470.508.090.

7.3 Interface Port 2

On the central board, the slot is port 2 for an optional interface module.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to select interface port 2, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all interface parameters is port 2:

Use interface:
> none (no use and interface is disabled)
> 2795.14 (Soehnle Professional strip printer / printer output 1)
> 2795.12 + 2795.20 (Soehnle Professional label printer / printer output 2)
> EDP bidirectional function (terminal can send and receive data / EDP output)
> EDP2 unidirectional function (terminal can only send data, not receive /
EDP output uni)
> Barcode for scanner connection (data reception for barcode processing/ storage)
> Second/large display (For use with Soehnle Professional Second/large displays)
> Digital scale (connection and adjustment according to the adjustment instructions 470.702.110)
If another interface is used for one of the functions, the corresponding function is blocked for all other
interfaces and is displayed like this.
Factory setting: none

Baud rate:
> 1200
> 2400
> 4800
> 9600
> 19200
> 38400
Factory setting: 9600

Data bits
> 7
> 8
Factory setting: 8

Parity
> none
> even
> odd
Factory setting: none

204
Xon / Xoff
> from
> a
Factory setting: off

Factory setting
> Do not execute
> Execute
Execute resets all individual settings in this parameter area to the factory setting.

For more information on all interfaces, refer to the separate interface description 470.508.090.

7.4 Interface Port 3

On the central board, the slot is port 3 for an optional interface module.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to select interface port 3, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all interface parameters is port 3:

Use interface:
> none (no use and interface is disabled)
> 2795.14 (Soehnle Professional strip printer / printer output 1)
> 2795.12 + 2795.20 (Soehnle Professional label printer / printer output 2)
> EDP bidirectional function (terminal can send and receive data / EDP output)
> EDP2 unidirectional function (terminal can only send data, not receive /
EDP output uni)
> Barcode for scanner connection (data reception for barcode processing/ storage)
> Second/large display (For use with Soehnle Professional Second/large displays)
> Digital scale (connection and adjustment according to the adjustment instructions 470.702.110)
If another interface is used for one of the functions, the corresponding function is blocked for all other
interfaces and is displayed like this.
Factory setting: none

Baud rate:
> 1200
> 2400
> 4800
> 9600
> 19200
> 38400
Factory setting: 9600

Data bits
> 7
> 8
Factory setting: 8

205
Parity
> none
> even
> odd
Factory setting: none

Xon / Xoff
> from
> a
Factory setting: off

Factory setting
> Do not execute
> Execute
Execute resets all individual settings in this parameter area to the factory setting.

For more information on all interfaces, refer to the separate interface description 470.508.090.

7.5 USB

The hardware of the USB interface is fitted on the central board, depending on the variant of the terminal, the
interface is led to the outside via a 4-pin socket.
Depending on how the interface is used, a special connection cable is required. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer or a Soehnle Industrial Solutions contact person.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the F4 arrow key to highlight USB, F6 Next.
Press F6 Continue using USB:

Use USB:
> None (no use and interface is disabled)
> 2795.14 (Soehnle Professional strip printer type 2795.14.003)
> 2795.12 + 2795.20 (Soehnle Professional label printer type 2795.12.003)
> EDP bidirectional function (terminal can send and receive data / EDP output)
Connection via virtual comport (CDC = Communication Device), Soehnle Professional USB interface
driver required (download available at www.soehnle-professional.com)
> EDV 2 unidirectional function, (terminal can only send data, not receive / EDV output uni). Connection
via virtual comport (CDC = Communication Device), Soehnle Professional USB interface driver
required (download available at www.soehnle-professional.com)
> PC keyboard, data cable 2550.03.027 required (Currently for PC keyboards with key assignment
German and French)
> Keyboard looping (Emulated PC keyboard function via USB interface) USB cable 2550.03.011 required
(print image must be unidirectional, limited string length)
For the keyboard looping application, the PC operating system must be MS-WINDOWS.
> data logger (description in chapter 7.5.1, data cable 2550.03.027 required)

If another interface is used for one of the functions, the corresponding function is blocked for all other
interfaces and is displayed like this.

206
After configuring the USB interface and exiting the setting mode, the terminal is reset and the display goes
out briefly.
Factory setting: none

7.5.1 Data logger

To use the data logger, a USB interface and the data cable 2550.03.027 are required.

Setting the use USB to data logger, then plug the USB key into the socket of the data cable.

If a USB stick (USB 2.0 or lower) is inserted, the "LOG" sign appears in the upper toolbar with a short beep
after a short installation time.
A folder named "LOG_3035" is automatically created on the USB key. This folder contains the file
"LOG_INFO.DAT" with the system-specific configuration data; this data must not be deleted or changed.

The log data are each recorded in a text file. The file name results from the sequence number, the year, the
month and the day. The files can be up to 200KB in size, then a new file is automatically created. If there are
less than 400KB free memory on the stick, the data logger stops operating.

To write the data in the log file, the print image EDV must be configured unidirectionally. A print image for the
data logger is available as standard. For an individual print image, please contact your Soehnle Industrial
Solutions service partner.
To configure the data logger push-key quickly, use the Info key and push-key, use the arrow keys to select
print image no. 11 Data logger and press F6 key Accept.
To write data to the USB key, the LOG symbol must be shown at the top of the display. In the factory default
print image Data logger, the print key is used to write the data to a current log file. During the transfer, the
LOG symbol in the symbol bar disappears briefly from the display with a short beep. The user receives
confirmation of the data transfer to the USB stick via this information.

Further data records are written to the current log file until the following conditions occur:
1. The log file exceeds 200KB file size
2. Press the "INFO" and "C" keys in succession.
In these cases, the consecutive number is incremented and a new log file is created.

When data recording is finished, the USB stick can be removed from the socket, after which the LOG symbol
in the toolbar disappears from the display with a short beep. Removing the USB stick from the socket of the
data cable should not be in the same time period as the data write cycle, otherwise data loss must be
expected.

Do not use different USB sticks in the recording process.

When changing to another stick, switch off the terminal, remove the stick and insert the new stick, then
switch the terminal on again.

Example Contents of a log file with alibi memory:

Start:
22.12.15;12:55:52;N 1,365 kg ;A0000168
22.12.15;12:58:21;N 0.539 kg ;A0000169
22.12.15;12:59:43;N 15,872 kg ;A0000170

End.

207
7.6 Ethernet

The hardware of the Ethernet interface is fitted on the central board. Optionally, the Ethernet 3035 L=10m
connection is used for pre-assembly 2550.03.025 or as a retrofit kit 2550.03.024. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer or a Soehnle Industrial Solutions contact person.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the F4 arrow key to highlight Ethernet, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all parameters of the interface is Ethernet:

Use Ethernet:
> none (no use and interface is disabled)
> EDP bidirectional function (terminal can send and receive data / EDP output)
If another interface is used for the EDP function, the function is blocked and is displayed like this.
Factory setting: none

IP address
Enter IP address ___.___.___.___
Werkseinstellung: 010.010.005.005

Subnet Mask
Input Subnet Mask ___.___.___.___
Werkseinstellung: 255.255.255.000

Gateway
Enter default gateway ___.___.___.___
Werkseinstellung: 010.010.005.012

IP port
Input IP port _____
Factory setting: 23

MAC address
Request MAC address e.g. 00:50:C2:97:D4:84

Disable MAC address bypass

> off
> on
Factory setting: off

Unit designation
For network identification, a freely selectable device name must be entered individually.
You can enter 20 characters [A-Z][a-z][1.9] without special characters.
The identification is then sent with the MAB (MAC Address Bypass) message, so that an IP address
assignment <--> Terminal is immediately available.
Factory setting: without input

For detailed information on all interfaces, refer to the separate interface description 470.508.090.

208
7.7 Print image

In Print Image, configure the parameters for print output.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the F4 arrow key to highlight the print image, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all parameters is print image:

Query expression (OK)

> off
> on
With on you will be asked after each printout if the printout is ok. Confirming YES returns to the weighing
mode, pressing NO repeats the printout until confirmed with OK.
Factory setting: off

Printout at G+T=0
> off
> on
If the scale is off and empty or tared (display = 0), no printout is generated.
Factory setting: on

Decimal separator
> ,
> .
> none
Decimal values (weight values) are output with the respective separator.
Factory setting: comma

thousand separator
> ,
> .
> none
Decimal values (weight values) are output with the respective separator.
Factory setting: none

Suppressing unity
> off
> on
When off, the unit is not suppressed and is output with.
Factory setting: off

Running time No. Print key

Enter the consecutive number via the output of the first print image via the print key. If the value zero is entered, the
function is not active. Starting with number 1, the value is increased by one after each output via the print key.
Factory setting: 0

209
Delete values after printing
This function can automatically delete the contents of certain data fields after printing or data processing in
applications with security aspects. Up to a maximum of 10 data fields can be individually activated for
automatic deletion via the print codes.
Details and settings of the print codes according to interface description 470.508.090.

Factory setting
> Do not execute
> Execute
Execute resets all individual settings in this parameter area to the factory setting.

7.8 EDP settings

The parameters for the EDP outputs are configured under EDP settings.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark EDP settings, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all parameters is EDP settings:

EDP mode
> no send the record
> A: Send data record 1 x immediately
> B: Send data set 1 x change of weight/still.
> C: Send data record Änd./Still.
> D: Send data record Änd./Still./> empty
> E: Send data record Änd./Still./<Leer/>Empty
> F: Send data set running
> G: Send data set 3005 running
> H: Send data set 1 x at breastfeeding
Selection for EDP mode (terminal automatically triggers the selected data record)
For further details see also interface description 470.508.090
Factory setting: none

EDP data set

> EDP print image (variable)
> EDP data set S20
> EDV Data. 2790 as v2.10
> EDP data record Easylog
Selection for the format of the computer record. Selection EDP print image variable is the default setting
according to the interface description 470.508.090 or can be freely configured via the service software.
Factory setting: EDP print image (variable)

EDP data record autom. <I>

> from
> a
At on, the data record with the print image <I> is automatically sent via the EDP interface after each
standstill. For the design of print image <I> the service software is required.
Factory setting: off

210
EDV Mode unidirectional
> no send the record
> A: Send data record 1 x immediately
> B: Send data set 1 x change of weight/still.
> C: Send data record Änd./Still.
> D: Send data record Änd./Still./> empty
> E: Send data record Änd./Still./<Leer/>Empty
> F: Send data set running
> G: Send data set 3005 running
> H: Send data set 1 x at breastfeeding
Selection for EDP mode unidirectional (terminal automatically triggers the selected data record)
For further details see also interface description 470.508.090
Factory setting: none

Time pattern data packets

Enter the time interval in ms for interface data packets using the numeric keypad.
Factory setting: 100 ms

Decimal separator
> ,
> .
> none
Decimal values (weight values) are output with the respective separator.
Factory setting: comma

thousand separator
> ,
> .
> none
Decimal values (weight values) are output with the respective separator.
Factory setting: none

Locking remote control (currently without function, implementation in later expansion stage)
> off
> on
Factory setting: off

EDP with STX-ETX

> off
> on
With on, the start character STX is placed in front of each data record and an end character ETX is placed
behind it.
Factory setting: off

Factory setting
> Do not execute
> Execute
Execute resets all individual settings in this parameter area to the factory setting.

211
7.9 Anybus

Under Anybus the parameters for the optional bus interface are configured on the Anybus slot. There are the
interface variants Profibus DP and Profinet.

Setting parameters
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to select Anybus, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all parameters is Anybus:

Fieldbus type
> not active
> Profibus DP
> Profinet
Selection of the fieldbus type.
Factory setting: not active

Address
Input of the Profibus addressing, numerically via numeric keypad
Factory setting: 0

Anybusmodukl cycle time

Input of the cycle time numerically via numeric keypad in milliseconds.
Factory setting: 50 ms

For detailed information on Profibus DP and Profinet, please refer to the separate technical description
Communication Profinet Profibus - 3035 (470.508.095).

7.10 Barcode

The program terminal 3035 can be used with a scanner to enter alphanumeric values as barcodes
read in. The read-in values are treated like keystrokes and can be used, for example, as product labels, tare
weights, reference weights, numerical values (piece counts), etc.
The data can be read into a manually opened input field or automatically assigned.
The content of the scanned barcode can be displayed in the information field of the display either time-
dependently (factory setting 2.5 seconds) or permanently.
On the output side, scanned-in barcodes can be output again in the data record or as a print document
will be. In addition, weight values and quantities determined by the scale can also be used as
barcode can be printed in encrypted form.
Your Soehnle Industrial Solutions service partner will set up the EDP data record and design the barcode
printout.

7.10.1 Decimal Separator Numeric

The data field with numerical activation in the service program can be set with or without decimal separator
for output as data or print content.
For numeric barcode outputs such as EAN13, the setting must be off, i.e. without decimal separation.

212
Setting the decimal separator
The type of decimal separator (dot or comma) is defined in the setting mode under the menu item
Communication / Print image / Decimal separator.
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Mark barcode, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Select decimal separator number, F6 Next.

Select the setting with the arrow keys and press F6 to confirm the setting.
Factory setting: on

7.10.2 Displaying the scanned values in the display panel

The scanned barcode can be displayed in the information field either time-dependently or permanently.

Setting the function to temporarily display the barcode contents

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Mark barcode, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Mark Timer Barcode, F6 Next.

213
You enter the time for the insertion of the currently received scan content in milliseconds using the numeric
keypad. If the entry value is "0", the function is deactivated.
You can enter values from one millisecond to 9999 milliseconds.
Press the F6 key to accept the input value and return the display to the barcode setting menu.
Factory setting: 2500 milliseconds

Activating the function Continuous display of barcode contents

In the setting mode under the menu item "Program settings" you can activate the function "Show barcode" in
the menu item "Display information field" in every user program (from weighing + taring to weighing in
percent).

If the Display barcode setting is confirmed with F6 Accept, the barcode in the respective user program is
permanently displayed in the information field

7.10.3 Barcode Selection Filter

Up to 10 different selection filters can be set for further processing. After the filter number has been defined,
the control character, then the first position and the last position of each filter must be set.

The application of filtering must always start with filter no. 01 and then continue without interruption with
ascending filter numbers. If there is a gap between the filter numbers, filter numbers that do not follow are
not taken into account.

214
Setting the filter functions
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Mark barcode, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 Mark Timer Barcode, F6 Next.
From this position on, the configuration of all parameters is filter functions barcode:

Selection Filtering No. 01

Press F6 to continue entering the filter no.

Enter the filter number starting with 01 and ascending to max. 10, then press F6 Accept.

215
After the respective selection of the filter no. (Ex. 01) the control character for further
processing/management is entered first.

The positions and control characters are entered numerically with a maximum of 3 digits each.
The factory setting for all parameters is "0".
Press the F6 key to accept the input value and return the display to the barcode setting menu. For the
assignment of the control characters, refer to the description 470.508.090 "Data interface 3035".

After entering the control characters Filter No. (Ex. 01) the start position is defined.

Input for the first position and then press F6 Accept.

Factory setting: 1

216
After entering the start position for the filter No. (Ex. 01), the end position is determined.

Input for the last position and then press F6 Accept.

Factory setting: 70

In total, a maximum of 10 filters with assignment can be carried out. The entry is made one level lower for
each "filtering and allocation":

> Control character

> First position
> Last position
For correct filtering, all parameters must be entered correctly. The entries of the positions can be
overlapping.

7.10.4 Barcode Multiscan

The Barcode Multiscan function enables the detection of max. 4 consecutive scans within a preset time
which can be set individually and is max. 9999ms (approx. 10 s). The scanned information is assigned to the
ORG memories A to D and output. In addition to the individual scanning processes, barcode control
commands can also be stored and executed accordingly. For this purpose, you can use all the commands in
the data interface description (document 470.508.090D) of the Terminal 3035. There is no plausibility check
due to the numerous possible combinations.

The individual scanning processes can be performed in any order, provided that the barcode contents can be
clearly distinguished from one another by means of the first three digits. Filters for scan ORGA to ORGD are
provided for this purpose, which enable the first three digits to be defined exactly in each case. The definition
can be made with the alphanumeric keyboard and the possible special characters of the 3035 terminal, such
as dot and comma, can also be used. If a clear identification via the filters is not possible, the sequence of
scanning operations according to the settings must be strictly adhered to.

If too few or too many scans are processed within the stored time, an acoustic warning signal sounds and
Error 97 is displayed.

217
The Multiscan number (1-4 scans) is entered under Setting mode / Communication / Barcode / Multiscan
number

Multiscan number

Cancel Accept

After entering the multiscan number via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.

The control command for the 1st scan (ORGA) is entered in Setting Mode / Communication / Barcode / Code
1st Scan (ORGA)

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.
In this example, the value 010 Read tare value was taken from the interface description 3035 (document
number 470.508.090D). The value can be entered with or without a leading zero. This is irrelevant for correct
execution.

Cancel Accept

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.

A tare weight can be read in with the aid of control command 010. This is done via a corresponding barcode,
which corresponds exactly to the number of digits on the scale.

The control command for the 2nd scan (ORGB) is entered in Setting Mode / Communication / Barcode /
Code 2nd Scan (ORGB)

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.

218
In this example, the value 083 Counting / reference weight fixed memory / article number was taken from the
interface description 3035 (document number. 470.508.090D). The value can be entered with or without
leading zero. This is irrelevant for correct execution.

Cancel Accept

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.

With the help of control command 083, a stored article from the fixed memory is called up in the Counting
program via the article number. The stored reference weight, target quantity and tolerances automatically
activate the counting function. See also chapter 5.11 article data counting.
Please note that for this example the terminal 3035 is set in the user program Counting.

The control command for the 3rd scan (ORGC) is entered under Setting mode / Communication / Barcode /
Code 3rd scan (ORGC)

In this example, only a customer name is to be scanned and output in ORG C. The output in the
corresponding ORG memory is automatic and applies to each scan. No separate control command is
necessary for this. Thus the factory-set zero remains unchanged.

Cancel Accept

As the number for the multiscan in this example is three, the code for the 4th scan is not taken into account.

To enter the time available to perform all scanning operations of a multiscan, select Setting Mode /
Communication / Barcode / Multiscan Timer

After entering the desired time on the numeric keypad, confirm the value with F6.

219
The factory setting is 2500ms (2.5s). The maximum value that can be entered is 9999ms (approx. 10s). If not
all the scans are completed within the stored time, the above-mentioned acoustic signal sounds and the
corresponding error message appears. In addition, the information already scanned is automatically deleted
from the ORG memories.
As the number for the multiscan in this example is three, the code for the 4th scan is not taken into account.

Cancel Accept

After entering the desired time on the numeric keypad, confirm the value with F6.

In order to ensure automatic allocation of the barcode contents, appropriate filters can be set for the
respective ORG memory if the contents are unique. These are always specified for the respective position (1 -
3) in the form from ... to.

Examples: A to Z allows all letters

0 to 9 allows all digits
A to A allows only the A

The entry to define the filter for scan (ORGA) is made in Setting Mode / Communication / Barcode / Filter for
Scan (ORGA)

The first three digits of the barcode to which ORGA is to be assigned can be defined. In this example, a tare
value is to be read in. It is ensured that this always begins with a digit. The second position can be a comma
/ dot or another digit. Therefore the uniqueness is not always guaranteed. For this reason, positions two and
three of the barcode remain undefined.

Filter for Scan (ORGA)

Overwrite mode
(F> key)

Cancel Accept

After entering the filter settings via the numeric keypad, confirm the settings with F6.

220
The following settings result.

Filter for Scan (ORGA)

Overwrite mode
(F> key)

Cancel Accept

The entry for defining the filter for scan (ORGB) is made in Setting Mode / Communication / Barcode / Filter
for Scan (ORGB)

The first three digits of the barcode to which ORGB is to be assigned can be defined. In this example, article
numbers that always begin with A and are continued exclusively with digits are to be read in. Thus the first
position is always an A and the second position is always a digit.

The following settings result.

Filter for Scan (ORGB)

Overwrite mode
(F> key)

Cancel Accept

After entering the filter settings via the numeric keypad, confirm the settings with F6.

The entry for defining the filter for scan (ORGC) is made in Setting mode / Communication / Barcode / Filter
for scan (ORGC)

The first three digits of the barcode to which ORGC is to be assigned can be defined. In this example,
customer names that are only recorded with letters are to be read in. Thus the first three positions are always
letters.

221
The following settings result.

Filter for Scan (ORGB)

Overwrite mode
(F> key)

Cancel Accept

Since the number for the multiscan is three in this example, the filter for scan (ORG D) is not taken into
account for the 4th scan.

By means of the unique filtering of the individual barcode contents, the scanning processes can be carried
out in any order and the Terminal 3035 automatically assigns them to the corresponding ORG memories.
If no filters are defined, the correct sequence must always be followed when scanning.

After all the presets have been made, the display should look as follows:

Gross

Printarea Printkey 2 Plus key Print 1

Example barcodes:

222
7.10.5 Print and Output Barcodes

Weight values or quantities determined by the scale can be printed out as a barcode. Scanned barcodes are
printed out as if they had been read.
To print barcodes, the print image must first be activated. The following print images with barcode functions
are preset at the factory:

> Print image no. 02: barcode 2795.12

(sample barcode code 128 on the print output 2795.12 + 2795.20)
> print image no. 10: barcode and weight
(barcode memory contents with net weight value to data output EDP)

With Info + push key, the respective print image / data record can be set to the push key. A Soehnle Industrial
Solutions service centre can adapt the print image to your specifications.

7.11 Batch processing

In order to be able to automate complex processes using the 3035 terminal, batch processing was
introduced.

From version 1.11 of the user software, the function is available in the 3035 terminal.

In Setting Mode / Communication / Batch Processing, the settings for batch processing can be specified.

The batch processing consists of up to 5 batch jobs, which are processed one after the other. For the so-
called batch codes (1 to 5), the control commands from the interface description 3035 (document number
470.508.090D) can be used. Due to the numerous possible combinations, a plausibility check is no longer
possible.

Batch processing

End Cancel Next

The control command for batch code 1 is entered under Setting mode / Communication / Batch processing /
Batch code 1

223
 Cancel Accept

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.
In this example, the value 220 Print (trigger push-key) was taken from the interface description 3035
(document number 470.508.090D). This command triggers the transmission of the print image or data
record stored on the pushkey.

The control command for batch code 2 is entered under Setting mode / Communication / Batch processing /
Batch code 2

Cancel Accept

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.
In this example, the value 221 Enter - key for triggering a new print code (in dialogue-free mode) was taken
from the interface description 3035 (document number 470.508.090D). This command triggers the
transmission of the print image or data record stored on the Enter key.

The control command for batch code 3 is entered under Setting mode / Communication / Batch processing /
Batch - Code 3

224
 Cancel Accept

After entering the control command via the numeric keypad, accept the value with F6.
In this example, the value 050 CLEAR ALL was taken from the interface description 3035 (document number.
470.508.090D). This command clears all memory contents and activated functions.
The value can be entered with or without a leading zero. This is irrelevant for correct execution.

The batch processing can be started in four ways:

1. Via a barcode with the content 074

2. Via a computer command: <K074K> or <Q074Q>
3. Via the print key
4. Using the Enter key

The physical keys are selected in Setting mode / Communication / Batch processing / Batch activation key

Batch activation key

no key
Print key
Enter key

Back Accept

After selecting the activation key, confirm the value with F6.
Caution: The selected key should not be assigned another function, such as printing.

Pauses can be stored after the individual batch jobs. The default value is set to 100ms. Basically, values
between 0 and 9999ms can be entered

225
 Batch processing
btw
btw
btw
btw
after End

End Back Next

7.12 IO control

The IO-Module 3035 has 6 outputs and 4 inputs which can be freely assigned to any function.
To use the switching functions, an IO card (optional accessory) must be installed in the program terminal
3035.
To use the IO module, the function must first be activated via the operating mode.

7.12.1 Selecting IO modes

> off
> on
> on, safety function

Activation IO control
To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark IO control, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark the IO mode, F6 Continue.

After you have made your selection by pressing the F6 key "Accept", the relevant function is active.

226
IO operating mode off
Function Switching outputs and inputs are deactivated.
Factory setting: off

IO operating mode on
Function Switching outputs and inputs are activated.

IO operating mode with safety function

The safety function keeps the outputs in low state after a power failure and restart of the terminal. Only after
manual release do the outputs return to their respective process-related state.

Enable switching outputs

After a voltage or power failure and restart of the terminal, the outputs are kept in low state.

The terminal automatically goes to the release window

By enabling "YES" via the function keys F1 to F3, the outputs are reactivated in their respective process-
related state. If "NO" is not enabled via the function keys F4 to F6, the IO control is set to "off". The inputs and
outputs are only reactivated by the new setting of the IO control with "on" or "on with safety function" in
setting mode.

7.12.2 Outputs

Setting the outputs

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark IO control, F6 Next.

227
Use the arrow key F4 to mark outputs, F6 Next.

Assign outputs
Menu window with the list for editing the function conditions for outputs S1 to S6

Move in the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. F6 "Edit" calls up the marked switching point.

For the called switching point S1 you will receive a list of the possible switching conditions

228
Move in the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. With F6 "Accept" the switching condition S1 is defined, e.g. for
the setpoint a weight value is accepted as switching condition.

After acceptance, the input field for the switching delay (timer) follows

The switching delay is entered in milliseconds. Enter the desired value with the numeric keypad. If you enter
the value "0", the switching delay function is deactivated. Press the F6 key to accept the input value.

After accepting the switching delay, the selection window for the polarity follows

If "normal" is selected, the switching signal is set from "low" to "high" at the required condition, whereas if
"inverted" is selected, the switching signal is set from "high" to "low" at the required condition.
Selection via the arrow keys F3 and F4, acceptance of the setting by F6.

229
After accepting the polarity, the selection list for the interlock follows

The switching condition can be blocked with one of these active input/output functions S2 to S6 or E1 to E2.
When set to inactive, the output switches immediately without blocking.
The selection is made with the arrow keys F3 and F4, the setting is accepted by F6.

After the interlock has been accepted, the outputs overview is displayed, unless the switching condition
selection is the setpoint, then the selection window for the switching point weight value follows

If "Net" is selected, the switching function is dependent on the net weight value, whereas if "Gross" is
selected, the active switching function is dependent on the gross weight value.
The selection is made with the arrow keys F3 and F4, the setting is accepted by F6.

230
After accepting "Gross/net" the input window for the setpoint follows

Enter the setpoint for the switching threshold with the numeric keypad.
The entry is made in the adjusted unit, change to the second unit with the function change key. The setpoint
can be entered with a positive or negative sign. Accept the input with F6 Accept.

After the setpoint S1 has been accepted, the menu window Outputs appears again with the list for

Processing of function condition for outputs S1 to S6

In the menu window the switching point S1 is shown with active condition switching delay timer (T), polarity
inverted (I), locking (V) and net (N), additionally the switching point of the weight value is always shown.

Repeat the procedure for all other switching points to be assigned. When you have assigned all desired
switching points, activate your entries with the F1 key "Activate".
Press the F5 key "Cancel" to quit without saving any changes.

Return to weighing mode with F1 end.

231
In weighing mode, the outputs are displayed in the information field of the Dynamic Switching application
program after the connected scale is loaded.
A fixed display of the switching condition in the information field can be set in setting mode under program
settings depending on the user program with IO control.
If a switching point is triggered by reaching the setpoint or by the occurrence of the specified condition, it is
dark in the display or, in the case of inverted light, it is highlighted as long as the event lasts.
By a summation procedure or by calling up the organization data memory, the display of the switching points
in the information field is interrupted until the scale is unloaded again.

Delete outputs
You can now delete all conditions with the F2 Delete or - key.
The deletion takes effect immediately and the display returns to the IO control menu.

Function options for the assignment of the outputs (output switching signal)
> not active Function of each output is disabled].
> Standstill [Signal at stability of the scale].
> empty message Signal within or below the range of the scale empty indicator].
> Underload Scale underload signal on the display, from -21 digit steps] .
> overload Signal on overload message Scale in display, weighing range +9 digit steps] .
> setpoint [Switching point comes from the specified nominal weight value].
> Scale ready Signal is not present for OFF, under/overload, error message, and power off].
> Weight under tolerance Signal for undertolerance, i.e. setpoint for weight or piece minus
minus tolerance].
> Weight weight weight over tolerance Signal for over-tolerance, i.e. setpoint for weight or piece plus
plus tolerance].
> Weight w. innerh. tolerance Signal for within tolerance, i.e. from setpoint for weight or piece
the range minus the minus tolerance to plus the plus tolerance].
> Setpoint reached exactly Signal for exact set value for weight or piece].
> Scale ready and weighing mode [Signal as for scale ready and also in weighing mode].
> Acknowledge truck scale [Signal after acceptance of the first, second and single weighing,
End of signal after reaching the empty message or canceling].
> Weight value below class [Signal when classifying Weight value below lower limit class 1].
> Weight value above class [signal when classifying Weight value above upper limit class 5].
> setpoint innerh.=1 Signal down and up as the target value for weight or piece].
> Under-tolerance withinh.=1 [Signal down and higher than the lower tolerance limit for weight or
piece].
> upper tolerance innerh.=1 Signal higher than the upper tolerance limit for weight or piece].
> Min. value (e/d) = higher Signal = or > the set minimum display value in e/d of the scale].
> IO <K310K0> =0 <K310K1> =1 [Signal on, with the computer/barcode commands <K310K1>; <Q310Q1>;
3101
or signal off, using the computer commands [K310K0>; <Q310Q0>; 3100]
> Data sent (500ms) [Signal of 500ms duration after sending the computer or print data].
> Blank [Signal as for data sent (500msec) and > Empty scale message].
> tare key pressed Signal when the tare key on the membrane keypad is pressed and held down].
> Taring is performed (500ms) [signal with a duration of 500ms after taring].
> Plus take-over (500ms) [Signal with the duration of 500ms after take-over Plus
to the totalizing memory)].
> Sum termination (500ms) [Signal with the duration of 500ms after sum termination].
> Enter key (500 ms) [Signal with a duration of 500 ms after the Enter key is pressed to confirm the
entry].
> MS Switchover (500ms) [Signal with the duration of 500ms when switching to another measurement
point].
> Enable start mode (500ms) [Signal with the duration of 500ms when the start mode function is enabled].

232
Function options for the assignment of the outputs (output switching signal)
> under Tol . >empty+still Signal after leaving the empty signal and the first standstill within
of the range of under-tolerance for setpoints for weight or piece].
> about Tol . >empty+still Signal after leaving the empty signal and the first standstill within
of the range of over-tolerance for setpoints for weight or pieces].
> inner Tol. >empty+still Signal after leaving the empty signal and the first standstill within
of the tolerance range for nominal values for weight or piece].
> fixed value accepted (500ms) [Signal after accepting a fixed value / fixed memory].
> Eth Sensor Write Access 1 [Signal comes while the write operation on the Ethernet sensor 1 is in
progress].
> Dyn. F1 key Signal for Dyn. function key F1, variable settings possible via computer].
> Dyn . F2 key Signal for Dyn. function key F2, variable settings possible via computer].
> Dyn . F3 key Signal for Dyn. function key F3, variable settings possible via computer].
> Dyn . F4 key Signal for Dyn. function key F4, variable settings possible via computer].
> Dyn . F5 key Signal for Dyn. function key F5, variable settings possible via computer].
> Dyn . F6 key Signal for Dyn. function key F6, variable settings possible via computer].
> Error detected Signal of 500 ms duration for each error detection].
> CL key pressed (500ms) [Signal with the duration of 500ms when the CL key is released].
> Eth sensor read access 1 [signal comes as long as the Ethernet sensor 1 is reading].
> Eth sensor spontaneous access 1 [signal as long as data exchange between sensor1 and 3035].

Note:
For the switching signals Ethernet sensor with the terminal 3035, the read and write process must be at least
40 ms, otherwise the signal is not recognised by the scanning rate cycle time.

7.12.3 Inputs

Setting the inputs

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
Use the arrow key F4 to mark IO control, F6 Next.

Use the arrow key F4 to mark inputs, F6 Next.

Assign inputs
Menu window with the list for editing the function conditions for inputs E1 to E4.

233
Move in the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. F6 "Edit" calls up the marked input.

For the called input you will receive a list of the possible functions

Move in the list with the arrow keys F3 and F4. Accept the selection with F6

After the acceptance follows the input field for the signal edge

234
Selection Signal edge rising (LH) the input switching signal becomes active on the edge from "Low" to "High",
while the input switching signal becomes active on the edge falling (HL) from "High" to "Low".
The selection is made with the arrow keys F3 and F4, the setting is accepted with F6

Input Variable K-command

In the case of the input function condition "Variable K command", the variable option means that there are
two further input windows.

Command code E1

Cancel Accept

Command code E1 (or up to E4), enter the desired three-digit K command code (EDP control command)
according to the technical description data interface 3035 (document no. 470.508.090), then confirm the
entry with F6.

Command parameter E1

Overwrite mode
(F> key)

Cancel Accept

The supplementary command parameter E1 (or up to E4) can be entered to the command code.
The content of the command parameter is according to the technical description data interface 3035
(document no. 470.508.090). Then press F6 Accept.

Examples of an input Variable K-instruction:

Set the tare hand value to 1500:
<K010K1500> K-instruction code = 010instruction parameter = 1500

Control setpoint 1.500 with minus tolerance 0.001 and plus tolerance 0.005 Read in and activate
<K180K1,500;0,001;0,005> K-instruction code = 180instruction parameters = 1.500;0.001;0.005

Delete control setpoint with tolerances:

<K184K> K-instruction code = 184Instruction parameter =

235
After acceptance, the menu window "Inputs" appears again with the list for editing the function conditions for
the inputs E1 to E4:

In the menu window the input E1 is shown with active condition for example request data set <B> and
triggering low-high (LH).

If necessary, repeat the procedure for the second input.

When you have assigned all desired inputs, activate the inputs with the F1 Activate key. The F5 Cancel key
exits the input without accepting any changes.

Return to weighing mode with F1 end.

In weighing mode, the inputs for the user program Dynamic switching are displayed in the information field,
occupied inputs are highlighted in dark.
A fixed display of the switching condition in the information field can be set in setting mode under program
settings depending on the user program with IO control.
A totalizing process or the call of the organization data memory interrupts the display of the inputs in the
information field until the scale is unloaded again.

Delete inputs
You can now delete all conditions with the F2 Delete or - key.
The deletion takes effect immediately and the display returns to the IO control menu.

236
Function options for the assignment of the inputs (input switching signal)
> not active Function of each input is disabled].
> Switch off [Signal edge switches off the terminal].
> Taring [Signal edge tares the current scale and goes to the net display].
> Delete tare [Signal edge clears tare value of current scale and goes to gross display].
> Zeros [Signal edge sets current scale to zero, within -1 to +3% of weighing range].
> Request data set <B> [Signal edge triggers the EDP request data set <B>,
EDP command [B> means send value once for change and standstill].
> Complete key lock [Signal locks complete terminal keyboard, without signal all keys are active again].
> Measuring point changeover [Signal edge switches to the next scale / measuring point,
the changeover is rising and rolling on several scales].
> Plus [Signal edge triggers Plus key function for the totalizing memory].
> Total [Signal edge triggers the sum key function].
> launch [Signal edge triggers Start function - key off].
> Print key [Signal edge triggers Print / Print - key function].
> Enter key [Signal edge triggers the Enter function - key].
> Blocking data record Signal blocks data output via interfaces for computer or printer].
> locking function Locks the inputs].
> Variable K command [Signal triggers a variable adjustable EDV K command.
For advanced setting, see [Input Variable K Command] above.
> PLC input in the status byte [signal of the input is transmitted in the scanning rate cycle time of approx.
40 ms via the Transfer Profibus/Profinet interface to the PLC in status byte bit 7].

7.13 IP sensors

Via the Ethernet interface as an EDP interface, sensors can also be connected in parallel via an external
switch. At the moment only one additional sensor is possible, after the later hardware expansion stage up to
4 sensors will be possible.
Note: In order to accept the setting parameters in the IP sensors area, you must finally activate them or
switch the terminal off and on again.

Enter sensor number

To call the setting mode, press F6 at key level Setting functions.
Use the arrow key F4 to highlight Communication, F6 Next.
With the arrow key F4 IP sensors, F6 Next.
With the arrow key F4 Sensor number, F6 Next.

Sensor number

Cancel Accept

237
After entering the sensor number with the F6 key "Apply".
Currently only sensor number 1 is possible.

IP sensors Enable
In the setting menu, select "Actuation" with the arrow keys in the IP sensors setting menu, then press the
function key F6 Continue to get to the Actuation selection window.

Activation
off
on

Back Accept

Scroll to on with the arrow keys F4, then accept the selection with F6 or with F5 Back a change is not
accepted. Factory setting: off

238
Connection state Queries
In the IP sensors setting menu, select "Connection status" with the arrow keys, then press the function key F6
Continue to display the Connection status window.

Display options:
> initialisation (there is no connection yet, toggling connection configuration)
> syn sent (an attempt is made to establish a connection)
> connected (connection to sensor is established)
> closed (connection terminated)

Connection state

Back

Press function key F5 Back to return to the IP sensors setting menu

Tip: For a permanent display of the connection status, you can open an additional secondary display with the
F3 key. The setting of the connection state sensor in the secondary display is made in the setting mode
under Setting mode / Terminal / Display / Secondary display.

Select manufacturer
In the IP sensors setting menu, select "Manufacturer" with the arrow keys, then press the function key F6
Continue to get to the manufacturer selection window.

Selection options:
> other manufacturer (to set non predefined manufacturers or parameters)
> Sick (manufacturer specific implementation, e.g. RFID sensor by Sick)
> Balluff (manufacturer specific implementation, e.g. RFID sensor from Balluff)
> ifm electronic (manufacturer-specific implementation, e.g. camera for volume measurement from
ifm electronic)

239
 Manufacturer
other manufacturer

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired manufacturer, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back.
Factory setting: other manufacturer

Select sensor type

In the IP sensors setting menu, select "Sensor type" with the arrow keys, then press the function key F6
Continue to get to the Sensor type selection window.

Selection options:
> generic sensor (for setting non predefined sensor type / application)
> RFID sensor (sensor type for RFID application)
> Volume sensor (sensor type for volume detection application)

Type of sensor
generic Sensor
RFID sensor
Volume sensor

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired sensor type, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back.
Factory setting: generic sensor

240
Enter the IP address of the sensor
In the IP sensors setting menu, use the arrow keys to select "IP address of the sensor", then press function
key F6 Continue to enter the IP address of the sensor input window.

The IP address is only required if the sensor is a server (host).

IP address of sensor

Overwrite mode
(F> key)

Cancel Accept

After entering the IP address of the sensor with F6 "Apply" or F5 "Back", a change is not applied.
Werkseinstellung: 010.010.005.005

Enter IP Port
In the IP sensors setting menu, select "IP port" with the arrow keys, then press the function key F6 Continue
to get to the IP port entry window.

IP Port

Back Accept

After entering the IP port with the F6 key "Apply" or with F5 Back where a change is not applied. Factory
setting: 10001

241
3035 Select socket type
In the IP sensors setting menu, select "3035 socket type" with the arrow keys, then press the function key F6
Continue to get to the 3035 socket type selection window.

Selection options:
> Client (Terminal 3035 application as client)
> Server (Terminal 3035 application as server)

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired selection, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back. Factory
setting: Client

Select interface mode

In the setting menu select IP sensors with the arrow keys "Interface Mode", then press the function key F6
Continue to get to the selection window Interface Mode.

Selection options:
> manual reading (manual data processing application in terminal 3035)
> spontaneous information (application spontaneous data processing in terminal 3035)

read manually
spontaneous information

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired selection, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back. Factory
setting: spontaneous information

242
Select RFID/generic action
In the IP sensors setting menu, select "RFID/generic action" with the arrow keys, then press the function key
F6 Next to get to the RFID/generic action selection window.

Selection options:
> Simulate K command (data content of the K command is executed)
> Simulate barcode (barcode data content is executed)
> save in ORGA (data content is saved in ORGA)
> save in ORGB (data content is saved in ORGB)
> save in ORGC (data content is saved in ORGC)
> save in ORGD (data content is saved in ORGD)
> K-command batch function (multiple K-commands are executed one after another)
> Store only in receive buffer (data content is only stored in receive buffer)

RFID/generic action

Simulate K commando
Simulate barcode
Save in ORGA
Save in ORGB
Save in ORG C

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired selection, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back. Factory
setting: Simulate K-command

Max. Waiting time a. Enter data

In the IP sensors setting menu, use the arrow keys to select "max. waiting time a. Data" in the setting menu,
then press the function key F6 Continue to enter the input window max. waiting time a. Data.

max. wait. time f. data

Back Accept

After entering the maximum waiting time a. data in ms with the F6 key "Accept" or with F5 Back where no
change is accepted. Factory setting: 4000

243
End of gen. Select sensor data
In the IP sensors setting menu, use the arrow keys to select "End gen. Sensor data", then press the function
key F6 Continue to open the End of gen. Sensor data.

Selection options:
> 0 (ending like Hex 00)
> CR (ending with CR)
> LF (ending with LF)
> ETX (ending with ETX)

End gen. sensor data

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired selection, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back. Factory
setting: 0

Ignore escape character '\' Enable

In the setting menu, select "Ignore escape character '\'" with the arrow keys and then press the function key
F6 Continue to reach the selection window Ignore escape character '\'.

Selection options:
> off (e.g. characters like <> are always used as start or end characters)
> on (if on, the next character after it is ignored)

Ignore escape sign ‘\’

off
on

Back Accept

Use the arrow keys F4 to scroll to the desired selection, then accept the selection with F6 or F5 Back. Factory
setting: off

244
8. PRINTING

The program terminal 3035 can be connected to a printer via the serial interface
to print out weighing receipts.
25 standard print images (EDP data records) are stored as standard.
Your Soehnle Industrial Solutions Service Centre can also help you with the design of individual printouts.
The parameters listed below in the standard print images can be used for the design of individual print
images.
In addition, organizational data (identifiers) and individual parameters such as company names or barcodes
can be included.
The print is triggered either by pressing the print key or another key / condition which triggers printing,
e.g. function key Plus.

8.1 Standard print images Factory setting

You can assign print images to the print-triggering keys with the 30xx service software.
In the factory setting, the following print images are already stored and assigned and can therefore be printed
out.
These standard print images for printer 2795.14 are examples and show which parameters are available.

Program
Date 31.12.15
Weighing and taring Time 09:13:28
Print image no. 01 Scale no. 02
Name: Standard
Print trigger: Push key Gross G0 ,154 kg
Tare T0 .015 kg
Net N0 ,139 kg

Program Date 31.12.15

Totalizing and picking Time 09:13:28
Print image no. 12 Item 1
Name: Plus Sequence no. 3
Print trigger: Plus key Scale no. 01
Tare T0 ,000 kg
Net N0 .154 kg

Print image no. 13 Item 2

Name: Manual input Sequence no. 4
Print trigger: Manual key Manual input 0,520 kg

Print image no. 14

Item 1
Name: Cancellation Sequence no. 4
Print trigger: Cancel key Cancellation 0,520 kg

245
Print image no. 15 ======================
Name: Total Total item 1
Print trigger: Sum key Gross Total 0.154 kg
Tare Total 0,000 kg
Manual input/pc total 0 pcs
Net Total 0.154 kg
======================

Program Date 31.12.15

Counting Time 09:23:15
Print image no. 16 Scales No. 02
Name: Counting
Print trigger: Push key Gross G0 ,694 kg
Tare T0 .016 kg
Net N0 .678 kg

Reference quantity 10 pcs.

Reference weight 12.2700 g

piece 55 pcs.

Program Date 31.12.15

Check Time 10:49:49
Print image no. 17 Scales No. 02
Name: Check
Print trigger: Push key Gross G0 ,183 kg
Tare T0 .030 kg
Net N0 ,153 kg

Setpoint 0.154 kg
Minus tolerance 0,005 kg
Plus tolerance 0,005 kg

Deviation - 0,001 kg

Program Date 31.12.15

Classification Time 10:53:10
Print image no. 18 Scale no. 02
Name: Classify Gross G0 ,282 kg
Print trigger: Push key Tare T0 .030 kg
Net N0 ,252 kg

Lower limit class 1 0,100 kg

Upper limit class 1 0,200 kg
Upper limit class 2 0,300 kg
Upper limit class 3 0,400 kg
Upper limit class 4 0,500 kg
Upper limit class 5 0,600 kg

Class assignment 2

246
Program
Date 31.12.15
Recipe Time 11:03:25
Print image no. 19 Scale no. 02
Name: Recipe
Print trigger: Push key Component No. 02
Tara container 0,108 kg
Net 0,097 kg

Container No. 02
Components in the container 03
Total containers gross 0,359 kg
Total container tare 0,108 kg
Total number of containers Net 0,251 kg

Total number of containers 02

Components of all containers 0007
Gross amount 0.968 kg
Tare sum 0,216 kg
Net amount 0,752 kg

Program Date 31.12.15

Neutral measurement Time 12:23:15
Print image no. 20 Scale no. 02
Name: Neutral measurement
Print trigger: Push key Gross G0 ,243 kg
Tare T0 .096 kg
Net N0 ,147 kg

Specific weight 73,4100 g

Quantity 2.0 LIT

Program Date 31.12.15

Truck scale Time 12:33:21
Print image no. 21
Name: First weighing Car registration number BK-SP 6000
Print trigger: Store initial weighing Sequential No. Holiday list 0002

Initial weighing < 24, 500 kg>.

Print image no. 22 Date 31.12.15

Name: Second weighing Time 12:42:23
Print trigger: Accept second weighing Alibi memory no. A0000171
Car registration number BK-SP 6000
Initial weighing < 24, 500 kg>.
Secondary weighing < 32, 650 kg>.

gross weight < 32, 650 kg>.

Tare weight < 24, 500 kg>.
Net weight CN 8,150 kg

Deduction of foreign material 10,00 %.

Net without foreign materialCN 7.335 kg

247
Print image no. 23 Date 31.12.15
Name: Single Weighing Time 12:42:23
Print trigger: Save Single weighing
Alibi memory no. A0000172
Car registration number BK-SP 6000

gross weight < 32, 650 kg>.

Tare weight PT 24,500 kg
Net weight CN 8,150 kg

Deduction of foreign material 10,00 %.

Net without foreign materialCN 7.335 kg

Program Date 31.12.15

Dynamic switching Time 12:55:43
Print image no. 24 Scale no. 02
Name: Dynamic switching
Print trigger: Push key Gross G4 ,240 kg
Tare T3 ,120 kg
Net N1 ,120 kg

switching point 1 0,1 kg

switching point 2 0,2 kg
Switching point 3 0,3 kg
Switching point 4 0,4 kg
switching point 5 0,5 kg
Switching point 6 0,6 kg

Status 111111

Program Date 31.12.15

Percentage weighing Time 14:28:52
Print image no. 25 Scales No. 01
Name: Percentage Weighing
Print trigger: Push key Gross G3 ,200 kg
Tare T0 ,000 kg
Net N3 ,200 kg

percentage value 170,1 %

248
These standard print images for the label printer 2795.12 are examples and show which parameters are
available.

Print image no. 02

Name: Barcode 2795.12 Gross weight
Print trigger: --- (can be activated via Info + Print)
G0 ,154 kg

Tare weight
T0 ,100 kg

More barcode examples to follow

Print image no. 03 31.12.15 12:55:43

Name: Label 2795.12.001
Print trigger: --- (can be activated via Info + Print) OrgA Name OrgA Content

Gross G 0,220 kg
Tare T 0,066 kg
Net N 0,154 kg

This standard print image for the label printer 2795.20 is an example and shows which parameters are
available.

Print image no. 04 31.12.15 12:55:43

Name: Label 2795.20.001
Print trigger: --- (can be activated via Info + Print) OrgA Name OrgA Content

Gross G 0,220 kg
Tare T 0,066 kg
Net N 0,154 kg

0,154

249
These data sets are predefined as standard for the data output EDV:

Print image no. 05 Org A Content 1

Name: ORG A to EDV Org A Contents 2
Trigger: Enter key when entering Org A Org A Contents 3
Org A Contents 4
Org A Contents 5
Org A Contents 6

Print image no. 06 StatusScale no. Net value

Name: EDV Standard
Trigger: request commands e.g.
<A>, <C>, <D>, <E>, <F> and <H>

Print image no. 07 Alibi memory statusScale no. Net value

Name: EDP in Alibis.
Trigger: Request commands <B> and <b>

Print image no. 08 Alibispeicher˽StatusWaagen-No. Net value

Name: EDP in Alibis. 3030
Shutter release: --- (can be activated via Info + Print)

Print image no. 10 Barcode memory contentNet value

Name: Barcode and weight
Shutter release: --- (can be activated via Info + Print)

These data records are unidirectionally predefined as standard for the data output EDV:

Print image no. 09 Net value

Name: EDP Weight decimal
Shutter release: --- (can be activated via Info + Print) Value without unit and 6 digits

Print image no. 11 DateTimeNet valueAlibi memory

Name: Data logger
Shutter release: --- (can be activated via Info + Print) Data division by TAB, end with CR LF

For further details of standard print images, see interface description 470.508.090

Reset standard print images Factory setting

To reset all print images of the terminal to the factory settings, you can execute in the setting mode /
communication / print image / factory setting with the selection and function key F6 Continue.

250
8.2 Conditions that trigger printing

The assignment of print images to print-triggering conditions is carried out by your Soehnle Industrial
Solutions Service Centre. Print images can be assigned to the following conditions:

Print triggering condition

Print - key 1

Autoprint / data record once immediately (<A>)

Auto print / data record once after weight change at stability (<B>)

Auto print / data record after weight change at stability (<C>)

Auto print / data record after weight change at stability above the empty signal (<D>)

Auto print / data record after weight change at stability above the empty signal after release of small
empty signal (<E>)

Send continuously (<F>)

Enter key when entering ORG A

Enter key when entering ORG B

Enter key when entering ORG C

Enter key when entering ORG D

Plus key

Enter / Enter key for manual input

Enter / Enter key for cancellation

Sum key (depending on the setting)

Container key (container seal)

Enter / Enter key for initial weighing (for details see 6.12.3 Truck scale functions)

Enter / Enter key for second weighing (for details see 6.12.3 Truck scale functions)

Enter / enter key for single weighing (for details see 6.12.3 Truck scale functions)

Auto print / data record once without weight change at stability (<H>)

Scanning

Print key 2

Broadcast continuously EDV unidirectional

Print item list

Enter key

Start mode (dynamic switching)

Measuring point switchover

EDP data record automatically after standstill (<I>)

251
8.3 Configuring the interface for the printer

Call the function level Setting functions with the function change key:

Level setting functions:

Aux. Setup
Gross x10 Program
display mode

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Press the F6 Setting mode key.

Use the arrow keys to select the EDV menu and press F6 Next to call the menu.
Use the arrow keys to select the Interface sub-menu, call up with F6 Next.
Use the arrow keys to select Use and then select the printer to connect.
Info: Soehnle printers are stored as standard, but other printers can also be created using the 30XX service
software.
The other parameters baud rate, data bits, parity and Xon/Xoff are set according to the specifications in the
printer manual.
The parameters for Soehnle Professional printers are set up in the factory.

8.4 Quick change of print images

If the scale operator should have the possibility to change print images directly at the terminal at short
notice, e.g. because a print image is required in different languages during the course of the day, it is
possible to assign stored print images to the pushkey in alternation.

Press the key , then the key . A list of available print images appears:

Print image Weighing + taring

Delete Back Accept

You can scroll through the list of saved print images with the F3 and F4 arrow keys.
Press the F6 Accept key to set the print command for the called print image to the print key. With the F2
Delete key, you can delete the changed print command from the print key.

252
9. SERVICE
9.1 Error messages

Error message Cause /Aid / Info

checksum error of the internal measuring point, readjust,
1 EEP CRC error
replace measuring point
2 wrong password Input Password is incorrect, enter correct password
3 not used
Scale unsuitable for part weight, if necessary change the
4 REF Weight too small
setting in the setting mode
5 zeroing not possible Deviation from zero point too large
Empty scale, scale in under- or overload, tare hand input with
6 Taring not possible
tare value over maximum load
Selected function does not allow to print, change or extend
7 Printing not permitted
function.
8 No unit switching Shift key locked or disabled, no 2nd unit defined.
9 Print character buffer full Printer not connected or in offline mode
10 Overflow load cell signal Load cell overloaded or damaged, measuring cable damaged
Cable interruption or short circuit to load cell, measuring point
11 No measuring point signal
defective
12 not used
13 not used
14 Measuring point not available Measuring point deactivated or defective
15 not used
16 not used
17 no free base All 4 adjustment points are occupied
18 not used
19 not used
20 Print format empty No print image content saved, create print image
21 not used
22 not used
Printer not plugged in or off-line, cable connection missing or
23 Printing failed
defective
24 Print image memory corrupt Load new print image, replace central circuit board
25 No print image(s) No print image saved, create print image
26 Negative value! Wrong entry, delete entry and re-enter
27 Out of tolerance Weight value is outside the set tolerance
28 Max. number of containers
Software limit reached, delete container
reached
29 Container open Lock the container with the container key before totalizing
30 Alibi memory full Ring buffer function is defective, replace alibi memory
31 Alibi printing disabled No alibi calls defined in print image, create print image
32 Alibi memory is initialised Wait until initialisation is complete, or exchange alibi card

253
Error message Cause /Aid / Info
33 Contents Alibi memory corrupt Replace alibi card
No data written to the alibi memory, create print image with
34 Alibi memory empty
alibi data
35 Alibi memory missing or
Retrofit or replace alibi memory
defective
36 Alibi writing not possible Alibi memory full, missing or defective, replace alibi memory
37 Read alibi not possible Alibi memory missing or defective, replace alibi memory
No original micro SD card inserted,
38 SD card incompatible
replace card
39 not used
40 not used
41 Input value less than
Clear input and repeat input, check keyboard
permissible
42 Input value greater than
Clear input and repeat input, check keyboard
permissible
Error list partially deleted, delete error list, replace central
43 Checksum error with error list
board.
44 Switching off not allowed Function blocked by locked keyboard or external command
45 totals Protocol memory full Max. 999 entries possible, delete total memory
46 Cancellation not possible Function blocked, wrong input in program sequence
47 Clear the totalizing memory first The totalizing memory must be cleared before a new
reference weight is determined; in setting mode the function
"Clear total before new reference weight" is activated.
48 No items available Cancellation not possible, as there are no items in the
totalizing memory
49 Totalizing memory overflow Value in totalizing memory too large, clear memory
50 Value below zero setting limit Measured value lower than stored zero point, scale
mechanically damaged, apply preload, readjust, replace load
cell.
51 Value above zero setting limit Measured value greater than stored zero point, scale
mechanically damaged, remove preload, readjust, replace
load cell.
52Overload Measured value above weighing range, unload the scale, load
cell defective
53 Underload Scale with preload switched on and then preload removed,
switch off display on the keyboard, restore the weighing
platform to its original condition, switch on display again
54not used
55Put on weight Scale empty or no unload has taken place according to the
set unload factor.
56Hoflist full Max. 50 vehicles possible in the onsite list, a vehicle is only
removed from the onsite list after a second weighing.
It is possible to delete individual vehicles or the entire yard
list.
57Resolution too high Input value not permitted, enter new value
58 not used
59 not used

254
 Ethernet card not correctly configured, Ethernet card
60 TCP/IP initialisation error
defective, replace
Fieldbus card not configured correctly, fieldbus card
61 Fieldbus initialisation error
defective, replace
Fieldbus card not configured correctly, fieldbus card
62 Fieldbus initialisation error
defective, replace
Fieldbus card not configured correctly, fieldbus card
63 Fieldbus initialisation error
defective, replace
Fieldbus card not configured correctly, fieldbus card
64 Fieldbus initialisation error
defective, replace
Ethernet card not correctly configured, Ethernet card
65 Invalid MAC address
defective, replace
Fieldbus card not configured correctly, fieldbus card
66 Fieldbus hardware error
defective, replace
67 Field bus module missing or Fieldbus card not configured correctly, install fieldbus card or
defective card is defective, replace
68 Fieldbus Telegram error Fieldbus card defective, replace
69 not used
70 not used
Waiting time for input command exceeded, retrigger
71 CAN input error
command,
Waiting time for internal communication exceeded, replace
72 CAN Messages Lost Error
central board
Waiting time for triggered command exceeded, no standstill
73 CAN timeout error during adjustment, check shield cable, increase value for
standstill window
74 not used
75 Replace buffer battery Replace battery
76 not used
77 not used
78 not used
79 not used
80 Cancel external command Data format for command wrong, check command, resend
waiting time for triggered command exceeded, no standstill
81 Timeout external command during adjustment, check shield cable, increase value for
standstill window
82 Number already available The identifier assigned to a fixed value already exists
83 Fixed value not available Correct input, check keyboard
84 not used
85 not used
86 not used
87 not used
Machine is overloaded with external commands, slow down
88 System overloaded
command sequence, check communication flow
89 not used
A maximum of 999 memory locations are available per
90 Read-only memory missing / full
memory

255
 Checksum error in the memory of the central board, save data
91 Prog-EEP CRC Error
again, replace central board
92 EEP Write Error Data cannot be written to central board, replace central board
93 not used
94 not used
95 not used
96 not used
97 not used
98 Barcode incorrect Barcode larger than 60 characters, shorten barcode
99 Global error for customer service for fault diagnosis

Your dealer and service partner or the service department of Soehnle Industrial Solutions will be happy to
assist you with further error analysis.

9.2 Error list

Error messages (ERROR) are recorded in the error list for traceability.

Call up error list

The current error list can be called up in Setting mode / Terminal / Error memory Error list. The last position
of the error list after the call is displayed.

Contents Error list:

Position of the error list

Date Time of last error
Number and error number of the error message
Text description of the error message

Scroll in the error list with the arrow keys F3 and F4, with F5 Back you can leave the error list.

The error list can record up to 50 errors.

9.3 Mirco SD card

The Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card (high-quality SLC memory card) is an optional accessory. The
Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card is required for fixed memory (read-only memory), alibi backup
(memory) and software update applications.
Other micro SD cards cannot be used and are displayed with error message Error 38 "SD card incompatible"
after switching on.

256
9.4 Software update

User software

The user software can be updated via the Soehnle Professional Micro-SD card (high-quality SLC memory
card). The SD card must contain the file with the software. The file name for version 1.00 is IMAGE100.LRS.

To start the update, press the ON/OFF key and the Enter key simultaneously while the power is off.

The following symbol appears on the display:

If the installed software corresponds to the software version on the SD card, this step is simply skipped.

The current software version can be called up in setting mode / terminal / version / user software AZG.

Boot loader software

The boot loader software can only be updated in the factory.

The current software status can be called up in the setting mode / terminal / version / boot loader software.

LRS Software

The LRS software can only be updated in the factory.

The current software version can be called up in setting mode / terminal / version / LRS Software AZG.

After performing a software update, resetting the terminal is recommended. For details on resetting the
terminal, refer to chapter 4.7 on page 36.

After activating the update function, the actions are entered in a log file.
The entries have the following format:
Position number, date, time, promotion code, old version number, new version number

Protocol memory

The current log memory can be called up in Setting mode / Terminal / Error memory / Log memory.

257
Possible action codes:
1Program update successful
2Log file was newly created
3Image file invalid
4Flash programming failed

Examples:
0122 .01.2015 12:45:12Code 020 .00 -> 0.00Log newly created
0222 .01.2015 13:23:46Code 011 .00 -> 1.01Program update
0327 .01.2015 14:07:48Code 041 .01 -> 1.02Flash write error
0427 .01.2015 15:23:32Code 011 .01 -> 1.02Program update

The log file can record up to 50 actions. When the file is full, the update function is disabled.

9.5 Supplementary documentation

Setting mode UCAL

For details on the program settings and the setting mode (UCAL), refer to the separate technical
documentation 470.702.112.

Data interface

For details on the RS232, USB and Ethernet interfaces, refer to the separate technical documentation
470.508.090.

Profinet / Profibus DP

Detailed information on the Profinet / Profibus DP interfaces can be found in the separate technical
documentation Communication Profinet / Profibus 470.508.095, Installation Instructions Profinet
470.561.097 and Profibus 470.561.102.

Calibration / ECAL

For detailed information on adjustment / ECAL mode, please refer to the separate technical documentation
470.702.110.
The 3035 terminal may only be adjusted by trained Soehnle Professional service partners.

258
259
Soehnle Industrial Solutions GmbH
Gaildorfer Straße 6
DE-71522 Backnang

Phone: +49 71 91 / 34 53 - 220

Fax: +49 71 91 / 34 53 – 211
[email protected]

470.051.168E V1.3 07/20 Subject to technical changes. www.soehnle-professional.com